Nikon | COOLPIXP7100 | User's Manual | Nikon COOLPIXP7100 User's Manual

DIGITAL CAMERA
Reference Manual
En
Trademark Information
• Microsoft, Windows and Windows Vista are either registered trademarks or
trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
• Macintosh, Mac OS, and QuickTime are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the
U.S. and other countries.
• Adobe and Acrobat are registered trademarks of Adobe Systems Inc.
• SDXC, SDHC and SD Logos are trademarks of SD-3C, LLC.
• PictBridge is a trademark.
• HDMI,
logo and High-Definition Multimedia Interface are
trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC.
• All other trade names mentioned in this manual or the other documentation
provided with your Nikon product are trademarks or registered trademarks of
their respective holders.
AVC Patent Portfolio License
This product is licensed under the AVC Patent Portfolio License for the personal and
non-commercial use of a consumer to (i) encode video in compliance with the AVC
standard (“AVC video”) and/or (ii) decode AVC video that was encoded by a
consumer engaged in a personal and non-commercial activity and/or was
obtained from a video provider licensed to provide AVC video. No license is granted
or shall be implied for any other use. Additional information may be obtained from
MPEG LA, L.L.C.
See http://www.mpegla.com.
Introduction
Parts of the Camera and Basic Operations
The Basics of Shooting and Playback
Shooting Features
Playback Features
Recording and Playing Back Movies
General Camera Setup
Reference Section
Technical Notes and Index
i
Introduction
Read This First
Introduction
Thank you for purchasing the Nikon COOLPIX P7100 digital camera.
Before using the camera, please read the information in “For Your Safety” (Avi) and
familiarize yourself with the information provided in this manual. After reading,
please keep this manual handy and refer to it to enhance your enjoyment of your
new camera.
Confirming the Package Contents
In the event that any items are missing, please contact the store where you
purchased the camera.
COOLPIX P7100
Digital Camera (with
Accessory Shoe Cover BS-1)
Camera Strap
Rechargeable Li-ion
Battery EN-EL14
(with terminal cover)
Battery Charger MH-24*
USB Cable UC-E6
Audio Video Cable EG-CP16
ViewNX 2 CD
Reference Manual CD
• Warranty
* A plug adapter is included if the camera was purchased in a country or region that requires
a plug adapter. The shape of the plug adapter varies with the country or region of
purchase.
NOTE: A memory card is not included with the camera.
ii
Read This First
About This Manual
Other Information
• Symbols and Conventions
To make it easier to find the information you need, the following symbols and
conventions are used in this manual:
Icon
Introduction
If you want to start using the camera right away, see “The Basics of Shooting and
Playback” (A17).
To learn about the parts of the camera and basic operations, see “Parts of the
Camera and Basic Operations” (A1).
Description
B
This icon indicates cautions and information that should be read before
using the camera.
C
This icon marks notes, information that should be read before using the camera.
A/E/F
These icons indicate other pages containing relevant information;
E: “Reference Section”, F: “Technical Notes and Index.”
• SD, SDHC and SDXC memory cards are referred to as “memory cards” in this manual.
• The setting at the time of purchase is referred to as the “default setting.”
• The names of menu items displayed in the camera monitor, and the names of
buttons or messages displayed on a computer monitor appear in bold.
• In this manual, images are sometimes omitted from monitor and viewfinder
display samples so that monitor indicators can be more clearly shown.
• Illustrations and monitor content shown in this manual may differ from the
actual product.
iii
Read This First
Information and Precautions
Life-Long Learning
Introduction
As part of Nikon’s “Life-Long Learning” commitment to ongoing product support and education,
continually updated information is available online at the following sites:
• For users in the U.S.A.: http://www.nikonusa.com/
• For users in Europe and Africa: http://www.europe-nikon.com/support/
• For users in Asia, Oceania, and the Middle East: http://www.nikon-asia.com/
Visit these sites to keep up-to-date with the latest product information, tips, answers to frequently
asked questions (FAQs), and general advice on digital imaging and photography. Additional
information may be available from the Nikon representative in your area. Visit the site below for
contact information:
http://imaging.nikon.com/
Use Only Nikon Brand Electronic Accessories
Nikon COOLPIX cameras are designed to the highest standards and include complex electronic
circuitry. Only Nikon brand electronic accessories (including battery chargers, batteries, and AC
adapters) certified by Nikon specifically for use with this Nikon digital camera are engineered and
proven to operate within the operational and safety requirements of this electronic circuitry.
THE USE OF NON-NIKON ELECTRONIC ACCESSORIES COULD DAMAGE THE CAMERA AND MAY
VOID YOUR NIKON WARRANTY.
The use of third-party rechargeable Li-ion batteries not bearing the Nikon holographic seal could
interfere with normal operation of the camera or result in the batteries overheating, igniting,
rupturing, or leaking.
For more information about Nikon brand accessories, contact a local authorized Nikon dealer.
Holographic seal: Identifies this
device as an authentic Nikon product.
Before Taking Important Pictures
Before taking pictures on important occasions (such as at weddings or before taking the camera on
a trip), take a test shot to ensure that the camera is functioning normally. Nikon will not be held liable
for damages or lost profits that may result from product malfunction.
About the User’s Manual
• No part of the documentation included with this product may be reproduced, transmitted,
transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any language in any form, by any means,
without Nikon’s prior written permission.
• Nikon will not be held liable for any damages resulting from the use of this product.
• Nikon reserves the right to change the specifications of the hardware and software described in
the documentation at any time and without prior notice.
• While every effort was made to ensure that the information in the documentation is accurate and
complete, we would appreciate it were you to bring any errors or omissions to the attention of the
Nikon representative in your area (address provided separately).
iv
Read This First
Notice Concerning Prohibition of Copying or Reproduction
Note that simply being in possession of material that was digitally copied or reproduced by means
of a scanner, digital camera or other device may be punishable by law.
Introduction
• Items prohibited by law from being copied or reproduced
Do not copy or reproduce paper money, coins, securities, government bonds or local government
bonds, even if such copies or reproductions are stamped “Sample.” The copying or reproduction of
paper money, coins, or securities which are circulated in a foreign country is prohibited. Unless the
prior permission of the government was obtained, the copying or reproduction of unused postage
stamps or post cards issued by the government is prohibited.
The copying or reproduction of stamps issued by the government and of certified documents
stipulated by law is prohibited.
• Cautions on certain copies and reproductions
The government has issued cautions on copies or reproductions of securities issued by private
companies (shares, bills, checks, gift certificates, etc.), commuter passes, or coupon tickets, except
when a minimum of necessary copies are to be provided for business use by a company. Also, do
not copy or reproduce passports issued by the government, licenses issued by public agencies and
private groups, ID cards and tickets, such as passes and meal coupons.
• Comply with copyright notices
The copying or reproduction of copyrighted creative works such as books, music, paintings,
woodcut prints, maps, drawings, movies, and photographs is governed by national and international
copyright laws. Do not use this product for the purpose of making illegal copies or to infringe
copyright laws.
Disposing of Data Storage Devices
Please note that deleting images or formatting data storage devices such as memory cards or
built-in camera memory does not completely erase the original image data. Deleted files can
sometimes be recovered from discarded storage devices using commercially available software,
potentially resulting in the malicious use of personal image data. Ensuring the privacy of such data is
the user’s responsibility.
Before discarding a data storage device or transferring ownership to another person, erase all data
using commercial deletion software, or format the device and then completely refill it with images
containing no private information (for example, pictures of empty sky). Be sure to also replace any
pictures selected for the Select an image option in the Welcome screen setting (A104). Care
should be taken to avoid injury or damage to property when physically destroying data storage
devices.
v
For Your Safety
To prevent damage to your Nikon product or injury to yourself or to others, read
the following safety precautions in their entirety before using this equipment.
Keep these safety instructions where all those who use the product will read them.
Introduction
This icon marks warnings, information that should be read before using this Nikon
product, to prevent possible injury.
WARNINGS
Turn off in the event of
malfunction
Should you notice smoke or an unusual
smell coming from the camera or
Battery Charger, unplug the Battery
Charger and remove the battery
immediately, taking care to avoid
burns. Continued operation could
result in injury. After removing or
disconnecting the power source, take
the equipment to a Nikon-authorized
service representative for inspection.
Do not disassemble
Touching the internal parts of the
camera or Battery Charger could result
in injury. Repairs should be performed
only by qualified technicians. Should
the camera or Battery Charger break
open as the result of a fall or other
accident, take the product to a Nikonauthorized service representative for
inspection, after unplugging the
product and/or removing the battery.
vi
Do not use the camera or
Battery Charger in the
presence of flammable gas
Using the camera in the presence of
flammable gases such as propane and
gasoline, as well as flammable sprays or
dust could result in explosion or fire.
Do not look at the sun
through the viewfinder
Viewing the sun or other strong light
source through the viewfinder could
cause permanent visual impairment.
Handle the camera strap with
care
Never place the strap around the neck
of an infant or child.
Keep out of reach of children
Do not keep the products within reach
of children. Doing so may cause injury.
Particular care should be taken to
prevent infants from putting the
battery or other small parts into their
mouths.
Do not remain in contact with
the camera, battery charger,
or AC adapter for extended
periods while the devices are
on or in use.
Parts of the devices become hot.
Leaving the devices in direct contact
with the skin for extended periods may
result in low-temperature burns.
For Your Safety
• If liquid from the damaged battery
comes in contact with clothing or
skin, rinse immediately with plenty
of water.
• If leaked battery fluid gets into your
eyes, rinse them out immediately
with clean running water and get
medical treatment.
• Do not attempt to charge batteries
that are not rechargeable.
•
•
•
•
Introduction
Observe caution when
handling the battery
The battery may leak, overheat, or
explode if improperly handled.
Observe the following precautions
when handling the battery for use in
this product:
• Before replacing the battery, turn the
product off. If you are using the
Battery Charger/AC adapter, be sure
it is unplugged.
• Use only a Rechargeable Li-ion
Battery EN-EL14 (included). Charge
the battery by inserting it in a Battery
Charger MH-24 (included). For
Remote Control ML-L3 (available
separately), use only 3 V CR2025
lithium battery.
• When inserting the battery, do not
attempt to insert it upside down or
backwards.
• Do not short or disassemble the
battery or attempt to remove or
break the battery insulation or casing.
• Do not expose the battery to flame
or to excessive heat.
• Do not immerse in or expose to water.
• Replace the terminal cover when
transporting the battery. Do not
transport or store with metal objects
such as necklaces or hairpins.
• The battery is prone to leakage when
fully discharged. To avoid damage to
the product, be sure to remove the
battery when no charge remains.
• Discontinue use immediately should
you notice any change in the battery,
such as discoloration or deformation.
Observe the following
precautions when handling
the Battery Charger
Keep dry. Failure to observe this
precaution could result in fire or
electric shock.
Dust on or near the metal parts of
the plug should be removed with a
dry cloth. Continued use could result
in fire.
Do not handle the plug or go near
the Battery Charger during lightning
storms. Failure to observe this
precaution could result in electric
shock.
Do not damage, modify, forcibly tug
or bend the USB cable, place it under
heavy objects, or expose it to heat or
flames. Should the insulation be
damaged and the wires become
exposed, take it to a Nikonauthorized service representative for
inspection. Failure to observe these
precautions could result in fire or
electric shock.
vii
For Your Safety
Introduction
• Do not handle the plug or Battery
Charger with wet hands. Failure to
observe this precaution could result
in electric shock.
• Do not use with travel converters or
adapters designed to convert from
one voltage to another or with DCto-AC inverters. Failure to observe
this precaution could damage the
product or cause overheating or fire.
Use appropriate cables
When connecting cables to the input
and output jacks, use only the cables
provided or sold by Nikon for the
purpose, to maintain compliance with
product regulations.
Handle moving parts with care
Be careful that your fingers or other
objects are not pinched by the lens
cover or other moving parts.
CD-ROMs
The CD-ROMs included with this device
should not be played back on audio CD
equipment. Playing CD-ROMs on an
audio CD player could cause hearing
loss or damage the equipment.
Observe caution when using
the flash
Using the flash close to your subject’s
eyes could cause temporary visual
impairment. Particular care should be
observed if photographing infants,
when the flash should be no less than
1 m (3 ft 4 in.) from the subject.
viii
Do not operate the flash with
the flash window touching a
person or object
Failure to observe this precaution could
result in burns or fire.
Avoid contact with liquid
crystal
Should the monitor break, care should
be taken to avoid injury caused by
broken glass and to prevent liquid
crystal from the monitor touching the
skin or entering the eyes or mouth.
Turn the power off when using
inside an airplane or the
hospital
Turn the power off while inside the
airplane during take off or landing.
Follow the instructions of the hospital
when using while in a hospital. The
electromagnetic waves given out by
this camera may disrupt the electronic
systems of the airplane or the
instruments of the hospital.
Notices
Notices for Customers in the
U.S.A.
SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS.
DANGER - TO REDUCE THE RISK OF
FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK,
CAREFULLY FOLLOW THESE
INSTRUCTIONS
For connection to a supply not in the
U.S.A., use an attachment plug adapter
of the proper configuration for the
power outlet if needed.
The power supply unit is intended to
be correctly orientated in a vertical or
floor mount position.
Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) Radio
Frequency Interference
Statement
This equipment has been tested and
found to comply with the limits for a
Class B digital device, pursuant to Part
15 of the FCC rules. These limits are
designed to provide reasonable
protection against harmful
interference in a residential installation.
This equipment generates, uses, and
can radiate radio frequency energy
and, if not installed and used in
accordance with the instructions, may
cause harmful interference to radio
communications. However, there is no
guarantee that interference will not
occur in a particular installation. If this
Introduction
IMPORTANT SAFETY
INSTRUCTIONS -
equipment does cause harmful
interference to radio or television
reception, which can be determined
by turning the equipment off and on,
the user is encouraged to try to correct
the interference by one or more of the
following measures:
• Reorient or relocate the receiving
antenna.
• Increase the separation between the
equipment and receiver.
• Connect the equipment into an
outlet on a circuit different from that
to which the receiver is connected.
• Consult the dealer or an
experienced radio/television
technician for help.
COOLPIX P7100
CAUTIONS
Modifications
The FCC requires the user to be
notified that any changes or
modifications made to this device that
are not expressly approved by Nikon
Corporation may void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
Interface Cables
Use the interface cables sold or
provided by Nikon for your equipment.
Using other interface cables may
exceed the limits of Class B Part 15 of
the FCC rules.
ix
Notices
Introduction
Notice for Customers in the State of
California
WARNING
Handling the cord on this product will
expose you to lead, a chemical known
to the State of California to cause birth
defects or other reproductive harm.
Wash hands after handling.
Nikon Inc.,
1300 Walt Whitman Road,
Melville, New York 11747-3064
USA
Tel: 631-547-4200
Notice for Customers in Canada
CAUTION
This Class B digital apparatus complies
with Canadian ICES-003.
ATTENTION
Cet appareil numérique de la classe B
est conforme à la norme NMB-003 du
Canada.
x
Notices for Customers in Europe
CAUTIONS
RISK OF EXPLOSION IF BATTERY IS
REPLACED BY AN INCORRECT
TYPE.
DISPOSE OF USED BATTERIES
ACCORDING TO THE
INSTRUCTIONS.
This symbol indicates that
this product is to be collected
separately.
The following apply only to
users in European countries:
• This product is designated for
separate collection at an appropriate
collection point. Do not dispose of as
household waste.
• For more information, contact the
retailer or the local authorities in
charge of waste management.
This symbol on the battery
indicates that the battery is
to be collected separately.
The following apply only to
users in European countries:
• All batteries, whether marked with
this symbol or not, are designated for
separate collection at an appropriate
collection point. Do not dispose of as
household waste.
• For more information, contact the
retailer or the local authorities in
charge of waste management.
Table of Contents
Introduction .......................................................................................................................................... ii
Introduction
Read This First ........................................................................................................................................ ii
Confirming the Package Contents.............................................................................................................. ii
About This Manual............................................................................................................................................... iii
Information and Precautions........................................................................................................................ iv
For Your Safety...................................................................................................................................... vi
WARNINGS ............................................................................................................................................................... vi
Notices ..................................................................................................................................................... ix
Parts of the Camera and Basic Operations ................................................................................. 1
Parts of the Camera .............................................................................................................................. 2
The Camera Body.................................................................................................................................................. 2
Controls Used in Shooting Mode ............................................................................................................... 4
Controls Used in Playback Mode ................................................................................................................ 6
Changing the Angle of the Monitor ......................................................................................................... 7
Raising and Lowering the Flash................................................................................................................... 7
Attaching the Camera Strap .......................................................................................................................... 7
The Monitor.............................................................................................................................................................. 8
Basic Operations.................................................................................................................................. 11
Switching Between Shooting Mode and Playback Mode ........................................................ 11
Using the Rotary Multi Selector................................................................................................................. 12
Using Menus (the d Button) ................................................................................................................. 13
Switching the Monitor Display (the x Button) ............................................................................ 15
Using the Viewfinder ........................................................................................................................................ 16
The Basics of Shooting and Playback ........................................................................................ 17
Preparation 1 Charge the Battery.................................................................................................. 18
Preparation 2 Insert the Battery..................................................................................................... 20
Preparation 3 Insert a Memory Card............................................................................................ 22
Internal Memory and Memory Cards..................................................................................................... 23
Approved Memory Cards .............................................................................................................................. 23
Step 1 Turn the Camera On ............................................................................................................. 24
Turning the Camera On and Off................................................................................................................ 25
Setting the Display Language, Date, and Time................................................................................ 26
Step 2 Select a Shooting Mode...................................................................................................... 28
Available Shooting Modes............................................................................................................................ 29
Step 3 Frame a Picture....................................................................................................................... 30
Using the Zoom................................................................................................................................................... 31
Step 4 Focus and Shoot .................................................................................................................... 32
xi
Table of Contents
Step 5 Play Back Images ................................................................................................................... 34
Changing How Images Are Displayed................................................................................................... 35
Step 6 Delete Unwanted Images................................................................................................... 36
Introduction
xii
Shooting Features ............................................................................................................................ 37
A (Auto) Mode.................................................................................................................................... 38
Changing A (Auto) Mode Settings........................................................................................................ 38
Scene Mode (Shooting Suited to Scenes) .................................................................................. 39
Changing Scene Mode Settings................................................................................................................ 39
Characteristics of Each Scene ..................................................................................................................... 40
Special Effects Mode (Applying Effects When Shooting) ..................................................... 46
Changing Special Effects Mode Settings............................................................................................. 48
Options Available in the Special Effects Menu................................................................................. 48
Low Noise Night Mode (Shooting Low-lit Scenes) ................................................................. 49
Changing Low Noise Night Mode Settings ....................................................................................... 50
Options Available in the Low Noise Night Mode Menu ............................................................ 50
A, B, C, D Modes (Setting the Exposure for Shooting) ...................................................... 51
Changing A, B, C, D Modes..................................................................................................................... 54
Options Available in the Shooting Menu ............................................................................................ 54
E, F and N (User Setting Modes)........................................................................................ 57
Changing E, F or N Mode Settings.......................................................................................... 57
Available Specialized Menu for E, F or N............................................................................... 58
Features That Can Be Set Using the Multi Selector................................................................. 60
Available Functions ........................................................................................................................................... 60
Using the Flash (Flash Modes) .................................................................................................................... 61
Using the Self-timer .......................................................................................................................................... 64
Smile Timer (Shooting Smiling Faces) ................................................................................................... 65
Using Focus Mode ............................................................................................................................................. 67
List of the Default Settings............................................................................................................................ 69
Features That Can Be Set Using the Exposure Compensation Dial................................... 71
Adjusting Brightness (Exposure Compensation) ............................................................................ 71
Features That Can Be Set with the Quick Menu....................................................................... 72
Available Quick Menu ...................................................................................................................................... 73
Changing the Image Quality and Image Size ........................................................................... 74
Available Image Quality.................................................................................................................................. 75
Available Image Size ......................................................................................................................................... 77
Features That Cannot Be Used Simultaneously ....................................................................... 80
Using Face Detection......................................................................................................................... 85
Using Skin Softening ......................................................................................................................... 86
Table of Contents
Playback Features............................................................................................................................. 87
Introduction
Selecting Pictures for Playback by Date (List by Date Mode).............................................. 88
Features Available in Playback Mode (Playback Menu) ........................................................ 89
Connecting the Camera to a TV, Computer, or Printer.......................................................... 91
Using ViewNX 2.................................................................................................................................... 92
Installing ViewNX 2............................................................................................................................................ 92
Transferring Images to the Computer ................................................................................................... 94
Viewing Images ................................................................................................................................................... 95
Retouching Photographs .............................................................................................................................. 96
Editing Movies ...................................................................................................................................................... 96
Printing Images.................................................................................................................................................... 96
Recording and Playing Back Movies.......................................................................................... 97
Recording Movies ............................................................................................................................... 98
Changing Movie Mode Settings ............................................................................................................ 101
Options Available in the Movie Menu................................................................................................ 101
Playing Back Movies........................................................................................................................ 102
General Camera Setup.................................................................................................................. 103
The Setup Menu ............................................................................................................................... 104
Reference Section........................................................................................................................ E1
Taking Pictures with Manual Focus ......................................................................................... E2
Using Panorama Assist................................................................................................................. E3
A, B, C, D Modes......................................................................................................................... E5
A (Programmed Auto), B (Shutter-Priority Auto) or
C (Aperture-Priority Auto)...................................................................................................................... E5
D (Manual) Mode ........................................................................................................................................ E7
Editing Still Images........................................................................................................................ E9
Editing Features ............................................................................................................................................. E9
k Quick Retouch: Enhancing Contrast and Saturation................................................... E11
I D-Lighting: Enhancing Brightness and Contrast ............................................................ E11
e Skin Softening: Softening Skin Tones .................................................................................... E12
p Filter Effects: Applying Digital Filter Effects .......................................................................... E13
g Small Picture: Reducing the Size of an Image.................................................................. E14
j Black Border: Adding a Black Border to Pictures ............................................................. E15
R Straighten: Compensating for Picture Slanting............................................................... E16
F NRW (RAW) Processing: Creating JPEG Images from NRW Images .............. E17
a Crop: Creating a Cropped Copy................................................................................................. E19
Connecting the Camera to a TV (Viewing Images on a TV) ........................................ E20
xiii
Table of Contents
Introduction
xiv
Connecting the Camera to a Printer (Direct Print) .......................................................... E22
Connecting the Camera to a Printer.............................................................................................. E23
Printing Individual Images ................................................................................................................... E24
Printing Multiple Images....................................................................................................................... E25
Editing Movies.............................................................................................................................. E28
Extracting Only the Desired Portions of the Movie.............................................................. E28
Saving a Frame from a Movie as a Still Picture ........................................................................ E29
Quick Menu ................................................................................................................................... E30
a Image Quality and Image Size................................................................................................ E30
b Sensitivity (Setting the ISO sensitivity)............................................................................... E30
c White Balance (Matching Image Colors with Colors as Seen with
the Naked Eye)............................................................................................................................................. E32
d Bracketing (Continuous Shooting While Changing the Shutter Speed,
ISO Sensitivity and White Balance) ................................................................................................. E36
a Picture Control (COOLPIX Picture Control) (Changing the Settings for
Image Recording )..................................................................................................................................... E38
a Movie Options (Changing the Type of Movie to Shoot)........................................ E42
Shooting Menu (A, B, C or D Mode)................................................................................. E43
Custom Picture Control (COOLPIX Custom Picture Control).......................................... E43
Metering.......................................................................................................................................................... E44
Continuous Shooting.............................................................................................................................. E45
AF Area Mode .............................................................................................................................................. E48
Subject Tracking Mode (Focusing on a Moving Subject)................................................. E50
Autofocus Mode......................................................................................................................................... E52
Flash Exp. Comp. ........................................................................................................................................ E52
Noise Reduction Filter............................................................................................................................. E53
Long Exposure NR..................................................................................................................................... E53
Distortion Control...................................................................................................................................... E54
Wide-angle Converter ............................................................................................................................ E54
Flash Control................................................................................................................................................. E55
Active D-Lighting....................................................................................................................................... E56
Zoom Memory ............................................................................................................................................ E57
Specialized Menu for E, F or N ................................................................................... E58
Save User Settings..................................................................................................................................... E58
Table of Contents
Introduction
The Playback Menu .................................................................................................................... E60
a Print Order (Creating a DPOF Print Order) .......................................................................... E60
b Slide Show.............................................................................................................................................. E63
c Delete ......................................................................................................................................................... E64
The Image Selection Screen ............................................................................................................... E65
d Protect...................................................................................................................................................... E66
f Rotate Image......................................................................................................................................... E66
i Hide Image............................................................................................................................................. E66
E Voice Memo............................................................................................................................................. E67
h Copy (Copy Between Internal Memory and Memory Card) ................................... E68
The Movie Menu.......................................................................................................................... E69
Autofocus Mode......................................................................................................................................... E69
Wind Noise Reduction............................................................................................................................ E69
The Setup Menu .......................................................................................................................... E70
Welcome Screen ........................................................................................................................................ E70
Time Zone and Date................................................................................................................................ E71
Monitor Settings......................................................................................................................................... E74
Print Date (Imprinting Date and Time on Pictures).............................................................. E75
Self-timer: After Release......................................................................................................................... E76
Vibration Reduction ................................................................................................................................. E76
Motion Detection...................................................................................................................................... E77
AF Assist........................................................................................................................................................... E78
Red-eye Reduction ................................................................................................................................... E78
Digital Zoom................................................................................................................................................. E79
Zoom Speed ................................................................................................................................................. E80
Fixed Aperture ............................................................................................................................................. E80
Sound Settings............................................................................................................................................ E81
Record Orientation ................................................................................................................................... E81
Rotate Tall ....................................................................................................................................................... E82
Auto Off ........................................................................................................................................................... E82
Format Memory/Format Card............................................................................................................ E83
Language........................................................................................................................................................ E83
TV Settings ..................................................................................................................................................... E84
External Mic Sensitivity........................................................................................................................... E84
xv
Table of Contents
Introduction
Built-in ND Filter.......................................................................................................................................... E85
Customize Command Dials................................................................................................................. E86
Multi Selector Right Press..................................................................................................................... E86
Delete Button Options ........................................................................................................................... E86
AE/AF Lock Button .................................................................................................................................... E87
Fn1 + Shutter Button............................................................................................................................... E88
Fn1 + Command Dial.............................................................................................................................. E89
Fn1 Guide Display...................................................................................................................................... E89
Fn2 Button...................................................................................................................................................... E90
Customize My Menu................................................................................................................................ E90
Reset File Numbering.............................................................................................................................. E91
Blink Warning ............................................................................................................................................... E92
Eye-Fi Upload ............................................................................................................................................... E93
MF Distance Indicator Units................................................................................................................ E94
Reverse Indicators ..................................................................................................................................... E94
Reset All ........................................................................................................................................................... E94
Firmware Version........................................................................................................................................ E98
File and Folder Names............................................................................................................... E99
Speedlights (External Flash Unit) ........................................................................................ E101
How to Attach a Speedlight............................................................................................................. E101
Optional Accessories ............................................................................................................... E103
Shooting with Remote Control...................................................................................................... E105
Error Messages ........................................................................................................................... E107
Technical Notes and Index ......................................................................................................... F1
Caring for the Products................................................................................................................. F2
The Camera ....................................................................................................................................................... F2
The Battery......................................................................................................................................................... F3
The Battery Charger ..................................................................................................................................... F4
The Memory Cards........................................................................................................................................ F5
Caring for the Camera ................................................................................................................... F6
Cleaning .............................................................................................................................................................. F6
Storage ................................................................................................................................................................. F6
Troubleshooting.............................................................................................................................. F7
Specifications ................................................................................................................................. F13
Supported Standards ................................................................................................................................ F16
Index .................................................................................................................................................. F17
xvi
Parts of the Camera and
Basic Operations
Parts of the Camera and Basic Operations
This chapter describes the parts of the camera and also explains the main
functions of each part and the basic camera operations.
Parts of the Camera ................................................2
The Camera Body ..........................................................................................2
Controls Used in Shooting Mode ............................................................4
Controls Used in Playback Mode .............................................................6
Changing the Angle of the Monitor .......................................................7
Raising and Lowering the Flash ...............................................................7
Attaching the Camera Strap......................................................................7
The Monitor.....................................................................................................8
Basic Operations.................................................. 11
Switching Between Shooting Mode and Playback Mode ........... 11
Using the Rotary Multi Selector............................................................. 12
Using Menus (the d Button) ............................................................. 13
Switching the Monitor Display (the x Button)............................. 15
Using the Viewfinder................................................................................. 16
If you want to start using the camera right away, see “The Basics of Shooting
and Playback” (A17).
1
Parts of the Camera and Basic Operations
Parts of the Camera
The Camera Body
1
2 3 4
5
Flash raised
6 7 8 9
Parts of the Camera and Basic Operations
10
11
12
Lens cover closed
13 14
15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
24
25 26 27
1
Eyelet for camera strap ................................7
2
Exposure compensation dial................. 71
18 Shutter-release button........................4, 32
3
Exposure compensation dial mark....71
4
Power switch/power-on lamp..............25
5
Mode dial...........................................................28
6
Quick menu dial mark .................................72
7
Zoom control ..................................................31
f : Wide ...................................................31
g : Tele......................................................31
19
h: Thumbnail playback.................35
i : Playback zoom.............................35
j : Help ....................................................39
Quick menu button ....................................72
8
20 Sub-command dial..............................51, 53
Quick menu dial............................................72
Infrared receiver (front)..........60, E105
21 w1 (FUNC1) button ..............................107
9
Self-timer lamp...............................................64
AF-assist illuminator.................................105
10 Accessory Shoe Cover BS-1.........E101
22
11 Accessory shoe...................................E101
23 Lens
12 Flash......................................................................61
24 Microphone (stereo)...............................90, 98
13 HDMI mini connector (Type C) ............. 91
25 Lens cover
14 USB/Audio video connector..................91
26 Lens ring...............................................55, E55
15 Connector cover ...........................................91
27 Lens ring release button...........55, E55
Power connector cover (for connection
16
with an optional AC Adapter)....E103
2
23
17 w2 (FUNC2) button ..............................108
Parts of the Camera
1
2
3
9 10 11
4 5 6 7 8
12
20
14
15 16 17 18 19
23 24 25
1
Microphone connector cover............ 100
2
External microphone connector...... 100
3
Eyelet for camera strap ................................7
4
K (flash pop-up) button.........................7
5
Diopter adjustment control...................16
17 d (menu) button....................................13
6
Autofocus (AF)/access lamp..................32
18 Infrared receiver (rear).............60, E105
7
Flash lamp......................................................... 61
19 l (delete) button.............................. 36, 102
8
Viewfinder......................................................... 16
9
c (playback) button......................... 11, 34
10 x (monitor) button ......................... 15, 16
11
g (AE-L/AF-L) button ........................5, 107
C (list by date) button............................... 88
12 Main command dial............................. 51, 53
13 Speaker ..........................................90, 102, 106
Parts of the Camera and Basic Operations
13
21 22
14 Monitor ..........................................................8, 15
15
Rotary multi selector
(multi selector) ...............................................12
16 k (apply selection) button ...................12
20 Tripod socket
21
Battery-chamber/
memory card slot cover ...................20, 22
22 Cover latch................................................20, 22
23 Memory card slot .........................................22
24 Battery latch.............................................20, 21
25 Battery chamber............................................20
3
Parts of the Camera
Controls Used in Shooting Mode
Control
Name
Mode dial
Parts of the Camera and Basic Operations
Zoom control
Rotary multi
selector
Main Function
Change the shooting mode.
A
28
Rotate toward g (i) (telephoto zoom
position) to zoom in, and rotate toward f 31
(h) (wide-angle position) to zoom out.
See “Using the Rotary Multi Selector” for
more information.
12
Adjust shutter speed or aperture value.
51,
53
Quick menu
dial, Quick
menu button
Display or exit the quick menu.
72
d (menu)
button
Display and hide the menu.
13
Main
command dial
Sub-command
dial
4
When pressed halfway (i.e., if you stop
pressing when you feel resistance slightly):
ShutterSet focus and exposure.
release button When pressed all the way (i.e., if you press
the button all the way down): Release the
shutter.
32
Exposure
Adjust the brightness (exposure
compensation
compensation).
dial
71
Parts of the Camera
Control
Name
Main Function
g (AE-L/AF-L)
Lock the exposure or focus.
button
A
107
Combined with the zoom control: Change
the zoom lens focal length.
Combined with the shutter-release
button: Shoot with the assigned function
setting.
Combined with the command dial:
Change the assigned function setting.
56
w2 (FUNC2)
button
Change the assigned function setting.
108
x (monitor)
button
Switch the monitor display.
15
Play back images.
11,
34
Delete the last image that was saved.
36
Playback
button
Delete button
107
Parts of the Camera and Basic Operations
w1 (FUNC1)
button
108
5
Parts of the Camera
Controls Used in Playback Mode
Control
Name
Playback
button
Parts of the Camera and Basic Operations
Zoom control
Rotary multi
selector
A
Main Function
• When the camera is turned off, press and
hold this button to turn the camera on in
playback mode.
• Return to shooting mode.
25
11
• Enlarge the image when rotated toward 35
g (i); display image thumbnails or the
calendar when rotated toward f (h).
• Adjust the volume for voice memo and 90
movie playback.
102
See “Using the Rotary Multi Selector” for
more information.
12
Select pictures and date.
34, 35
• Play back movies.
• Switch from image thumbnail or
zoomed image display to full-frame
playback mode.
102
12
Display and hide the menu.
13
Delete button
Delete images.
36
C (list by
date) button
Display the list by date screen.
88
x (monitor)
button
Switch the monitor display.
15
Main
command dial
Sub-command
dial
Apply
selection
button
d (menu)
button
ShutterReturn to shooting mode.
release button
6
–
Parts of the Camera
Changing the Angle of the Monitor
The angle of the monitor can be lowered down to approx. 81° or raised upward to
approx. 105°. This is convenient when taking pictures with the camera held at high
or low positions.
Parts of the Camera and Basic Operations
B
Notes on Monitor
• Do not apply excessive force when changing the angle of the monitor.
• The monitor cannot be moved horizontally.
• Put the monitor back in the original position when using in normal situations.
Raising and Lowering the Flash
Press the K (flash pop-up) button to raise the flash.
• See “Using the Flash (Flash Modes)” (A61) for more information on setting the flash.
• When not using the flash, lower it by gently pushing it down until it clicks.
Attaching the Camera Strap
Attach the strap at
two places.
7
Parts of the Camera
The Monitor
• The information that is displayed on the monitor during shooting and playback
changes depending on the camera’s settings and state of use. Press the x
(monitor) button to hide or show the information on the monitor (A15).
Shooting Mode
47
3
4
5
6
46
Parts of the Camera and Basic Operations
45
7
10
2
44
11
8 9
1
43
15
12
18
42
13
16
14
17
19
21
20
41
40
24
39
38
37
1/250
F5.6
36
30
22
999
23
29
25
28
999
9999
35
34 33 32
1m 0s
1m 0s
a
31
26
b
27
48
49
50
1/250
F5.6
1342
1/250
51
1/250
8
52
F5.6
1342
1/250
1/25
F5.6
F5.
1342
F5.6
1342
53
1/250
F5.6
1342
Parts of the Camera
15 Noise reduction filter ......................................55
16 Long exposure NR.............................................55
17 Motion detection icon ...........................105
18 Wind noise reduction..............................101
19 “Date not set” indicator..................27, 104
20 Travel destination indicator.................104
21 Print date.........................................................104
Eye-Fi communication indicator
22 .............................................................. 108, E93
23 Metering.............................................................54
24 w1 button operation indicator .....108
25 Image quality ..........................................74, 75
26 Image size..................................................74, 77
27 Movie options......................................73, 100
(a) Number of exposures remaining
(still pictures) ....................................24, 78
28
(b) Movie length.................................98, 100
29 Internal memory indicator..................... 24
30 Aperture value............................................... 51
31 Focus area (for center) ................32, 55, 60
32 Focus area (for manual)........42, 43, 55, 60
33 Focus area (for auto)............................ 55, 60
Focus area (for face detection,
34 pet detection) ..................45, 55, 60, 65, 85
Focus area (for subject tracking)
35 .......................................................................... 55, 60
Parts of the Camera and Basic Operations
Shooting mode......................................28, 29
Focus mode......................................................68
Quick menu dial indicator.......................72
Zoom indicator ..............................................31
Zoom memory...............................................56
AE/AF-L indicator....................................E4
6 AE-L/AF-L button setting......................107
7 Flash mode .......................................................62
8 Speedlight............................................. E101
9 Flash exp. comp.....................................50, 55
10 Battery level indicator ................................24
Monitor brightness boost indicator
11 ..................................................................................16
12 Vibration reduction icon .......................105
13 Distortion control .........................................55
14 Wide-angle converter................................55
1
2
3
4
5
36 Shutter speed................................................. 51
37 Exposure indicator............................................ 53
38 ISO sensitivity ..........................................30, 73
39 Exposure compensation value............ 71
40 Active D-Lighting......................................... 55
41 Built-in ND filter...........................................107
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
COOLPIX Picture Control......................... 73
White balance ................................................ 73
Continuous shooting mode..... 45, 50, 54
Backlighting (HDR) ........................................... 44
Auto bracketing............................................ 73
Self-timer........................................................... 64
Remote control ............................................. 60
Smile timer .............................................................. 65
Spot metering area ..................................50, 54
Center-weighted area............................50, 54
Virtual horizon (bars)................................104
Virtual horizon (circle) .............................104
View/hide histograms.............................104
View/hide framing grid ..........................104
9
Parts of the Camera
Playback Mode
1
24
Parts of the Camera and Basic Operations
22
21
19
18
16
15
2 3
15/11/2011 12:00
9999.JPG
9999.JP
7
23
9 10
20
8
17
11
999/999
14
13
999/999
9999/9999
1m 0s
1m 0s
a
b
12
1
Date of recording......................................... 26
13 Internal memory indicator ..................... 34
2
Time of recording ........................................ 26
14 Movie playback guide............................ 102
3
Voice memo indicator............................... 90
15 List by date guide......................................... 88
4
List by date display...................................... 88
16 Volume indicator ................................90, 102
5
Battery level indicator ............................... 24
17 Black border indicator ............................... 90
6
Monitor brightness boost indicator
................................................................................. 16
18 D-Lighting icon ............................................. 89
7
Protect icon...................................................... 89
8
Print order icon.............................................. 89
9
Image quality.................................................. 75
10 Image size......................................................... 77
11 Movie options ......................................73, 100
(a) Current image number/total
number of images................................ 34
12
(b) Movie length .........................................102
10
5
6
4
19 Quick retouch icon...................................... 89
20 Filter effects icon........................................... 89
21 Small picture ...................................89, E19
22 Straighten indicator.................................... 90
23 Skin softening icon...................................... 89
24 File number and type ........................E99
Basic Operations
Switching Between Shooting Mode and Playback Mode
Shooting mode
Playback mode
15/11/2011 15:30
0004.JPG
1/250
F5.6
4
38
4
Parts of the Camera and Basic Operations
The camera has two modes of operation: Shooting mode, which is used for taking
pictures, and playback mode, which is used for viewing pictures.
Press the c (playback) button to switch between shooting mode and playback
mode.
• While using playback mode, you can also switch to shooting mode by pressing
the shutter-release button.
List by date
Auto mode
26/11/2011
4
20/11/2011
11
18/11/2011
8
15/11/2011
4
List by date mode
• Rotate the mode dial and align an icon to the mark to select different shooting
modes (A28, 29).
• Press the C (list by date) button in playback mode to select pictures for
playback by shooting date (A88).
11
Basic Operations
Using the Rotary Multi Selector
Operate by rotating the rotary multi selector, pressing up (H), down (I), left (J)
or right (K) on the rotary multi selector, or pressing the k button.
• The “rotary multi selector” is also referred to as the “multi selector” in this
manual.
When Using Shooting Mode
Parts of the Camera and Basic Operations
Rotate to select an option1
Display m (flash mode)
(A61) menu
Display n (Self-timer/
Smile timer/
Remote control) menu
(A64, 65, E105)
Display G (AF area
mode) menu2 (A55)
Flash mode
Apply selection
Display D (focus mode) menu (A67)
1
2
Items can also be chosen by pressing up, down, left or right.
Displayed for A, B, C, D, E, F and N modes, O (low noise night) mode, and u
(special effects) mode.
When Using Playback Mode
Select the previous
image1, move the
displayed area when
the image is
magnified (A35).
Play back movies
(A102)2
1
2
15/11/2011 15:30
0004.JPG
Select the next
image1, move the
displayed area
when the image is
magnified (A35).
4
Previous or next images can also be chosen by rotating the rotary multi selector.
When displaying image thumbnails or when the image is magnified, this button switches the
camera to full-frame playback mode.
When Displaying Menus
Select the item above*
Select the item on the
left*, return display to
the previous screen
Select the item
below*
Select the item on
the right*, display
sub-menu (apply
selection)
Apply selection
Shooting menu
Custom Picture Control
Metering
Continuous
AF area mode
Autofocus mode
Flash exp. comp.
Noise reduction filter
* Items above or below can also be chosen by rotating the rotary multi selector.
12
4
Basic Operations
Using Menus (the d Button)
When the d button is pressed while the shooting screen or playback screen is
displayed, the menu for the current mode is displayed. Once the menu is
displayed, various settings can be changed.
Shooting mode
Playback mode
15/11/2011 15:30
0004.JPG
F5.6
4
38
Shooting menu
Tabs
Custom Picture Control
Metering
Continuous
AF area mode
Autofocus mode
Flash exp. comp.
Noise reduction filter
4
Playback menu
Tabs
Quick retouch
D-Lighting
Skin softening
Filter effects
Print order
Slide show
Delete
Parts of the Camera and Basic Operations
1/250
W tab:
Displays the settings that can be changed for the current shooting mode (A29).
Depending on the current shooting mode, the tab icon that is displayed will be different.
• A (auto): Tabs are not displayed.
• C (scene): Scene menu tab (A39)
• R (special effects): Special effects menu tab (A48)
• O (low noise night): Low noise night menu tab (A50)
• A, B, C, D: Shooting menu tab (A54)
• E, F, N: E, F, N specialized menu tab (E58), shooting menu tab on the second
level
• D (movie): Movie menu tab (A101)
c tab:
Displays the settings that can be changed for the current playback mode (A89).
Depending on the current playback mode, the tab icon that is displayed will be different.
z tab:
Displays the setup menu, where you can change a number of general settings.
13
Basic Operations
Switching Between Tabs
Shooting menu
Custom Picture Control
Metering
Continuous
AF area mode
Autofocus mode
Flash exp. comp.
Noise reduction filter
Parts of the Camera and Basic Operations
Press the rotary multi
selector J to highlight
the tab.
Custom Picture Control
Metering
Continuous
AF area mode
Autofocus mode
Flash exp. comp.
Noise reduction filter
Press the rotary multi
selector H or I to select a
tab, and press the k
button or K.
Set up
Welcome screen
Time zone and date
Monitor settings
Print date
Self-timer: after release
Vibration reduction
Motion detection
The selected menu is
displayed.
Selecting Menu Items
Shooting menu
Custom Picture Control
Metering
Continuous
AF area mode
Autofocus mode
Flash exp. comp.
Noise reduction filter
Press the rotary multi
selector H or I to select
an item, and then press
K or the k button.
C
Autofocus mode
Single AF
Full-time AF
Press H or I to select an
item and then press the
k button.
When you finished
changing settings, press
the d (menu) button
to exit the menu.
Displayed When the Menu Contains Two or More Pages
Shooting menu
Custom Picture Control
Metering
Continuous
AF area mode
Autofocus mode
Flash exp. comp.
Noise reduction filter
14
Shooting menu
The scroll bar is displayed to indicate the current page.
Basic Operations
Switching the Monitor Display (the x Button)
To switch between the information displayed
on the monitor during shooting and playback,
press the x (monitor) button.
Shooting Mode
1342
F5.6
Information hidden
Monitor off 1
Display the picture and the
shooting information.
Display the picture only.
Turn off the monitor.
Display photo information
Information hidden
Display the picture and photo
information.
Display the picture only.
Tone level information2
(excluding movies)
Playback Mode
Parts of the Camera and Basic Operations
1/250
Display information
15/11/2011 15:30
0004.JPG
1/250
4 132
F5.6
4 132
Display a histogram3, tone level
and shooting information4.
1 Available when the mode dial is set to A, B, C, D, E, F or N. The shutter does not click when
the subject is not in focus and the AF/access lamp does not light up.
2 You can check for loss of contrast detail in highlights and shadows from the histogram that is
displayed, or the blinking display for each tone level. These provide guidelines when adjusting the
picture brightness with functions such as exposure compensation. When the tone level to check is
selected by pressing the rotary multi selector J or K, the area of the picture that corresponds to
the chosen tone level blinks.
3 The histogram is a bar graph that shows the brightness distribution in the picture. The horizontal
axis corresponds to pixel brightness, with dark tones to the left and bright tones to the right. The
vertical axis shows the number of pixels.
4 The shooting information displayed includes the shooting mode A, B, C or D, shutter speed,
aperture value, image quality, image size, ISO sensitivity, white balance, exposure compensation,
COOLPIX Picture Control, and the current frame number/total number of frames.
A is displayed when the shooting mode A, y, u, O or A is chosen.
15
Basic Operations
C
Holding Down the x Button and b (Monitor Brightness Boost Indicator)
Hold down the x button to set the monitor to the maximum brightness. To return the brightness
to its original level, hold down the x button again or turn off the camera. When the brightness is set
to the maximum with the x button, b (monitor brightness boost indicator) is displayed on the
monitor.
C
Parts of the Camera and Basic Operations
Using the Viewfinder
Use the viewfinder to frame pictures when bright light
makes it difficult to see the monitor.
When the image in the viewfinder is difficult to see,
adjust by rotating the diopter adjustment control while
looking through the viewfinder.
• Take care not to scratch your eye with your fingertips
or nails.
B
16
Virtual Horizon, Histogram and Framing Grid Displays for Shooting
• The display options for the monitor can be changed in Photo info (E74) of Monitor settings
in the setup menu. A virtual horizon, histogram and framing grid are available as the display
options.
• The setting for virtual horizon display can be changed in Virtual horizon display of Monitor
settings in the setup menu (A104). The default setting is Circle.
Diopter
adjustment
control
Viewfinder
Notes on the Viewfinder
As the area visible in the viewfinder may differ from that of the final picture, use the monitor to frame
pictures in the following situations:
• When shooting at ranges of about 2 m (6 ft 7 in.) or less at the maximum telephoto zoom position
• When a wide-angle converter lens is used (available separately; E103)
• When the digital zoom is applied (A31)
• When shooting at an Image size (A77) of I 3648×2432, z 3584×2016 or H 2736×2736
The Basics of Shooting and
Playback
Preparation
Shooting
Step 1 Turn the Camera On..............................................................................................24
Setting the Display Language, Date, and Time (First Use Only) .....................26
Step 2 Select a Shooting Mode.......................................................................................28
Step 3 Frame a Picture .......................................................................................................30
Step 4 Focus and Shoot.....................................................................................................32
The Basics of Shooting and Playback
Preparation 1 Charge the Battery ..................................................................................18
Preparation 2 Insert the Battery .....................................................................................20
Preparation 3 Insert a Memory Card.............................................................................22
Playback
Step 5 Play Back Images ....................................................................................................34
Step 6 Delete Unwanted Images ...................................................................................36
17
The Basics of Shooting and Playback
Preparation 1 Charge the Battery
1
Prepare the included Battery Charger MH-24.
If a plug adapter* is included with your camera, attach the
plug adapter to the plug on the Battery Charger. Push the plug
adapter firmly until it is securely held in place. Once the two
are connected, attempting to forcibly remove the plug
adapter could damage the product.
* The shape of the plug adapter varies according to the
country or region in which the camera was purchased.
The Basics of Shooting and Playback
The Battery Charger comes with the plug adapter attached in
Argentina, Brazil and Korea.
2
While pushing in the battery (1), set it into the Battery Charger (2).
1
3
2
Plug the Battery Charger into an electrical outlet.
• CHARGE lamp starts blinking when charging starts.
• A fully-exhausted battery charges in about one hour and
30 minutes.
• When charging is complete, the CHARGE lamp stops
blinking.
• See “Understanding CHARGE Lamp” (A19).
4
18
CHARGE
lamp
When charging is complete, remove the battery and then disconnect
the Battery Charger from the electrical outlet.
Preparation 1 Charge the Battery
Understanding CHARGE Lamp
Status
Battery charging.
On
Battery fully charged.
Flickers
• The battery is set incorrectly. Disconnect the Battery
Charger from the electrical outlet, remove the battery, and
then reset the battery to lie flat in the Battery Charger.
• Operating temperature range exceeded. Charge the
battery indoors while the ambient temperature is 5°C to
35°C (41°F to 95°F).
• The battery is faulty. Immediately disconnect the Battery
Charger from the electrical outlet, and stop charging. Take
the battery and Battery Charger to your retailer or Nikonauthorized service representative.
The Basics of Shooting and Playback
B
Description
Blinks
Notes on Battery Charger
• Be sure to read and follow the warnings of “For Your Safety” (Avi) thoroughly before using the
Battery Charger.
• Be sure to read and follow the warnings for “The Battery Charger” (F4) thoroughly before using
the battery.
B
Notes on Battery
• Be sure to read and follow the warnings of “For Your Safety” (Avi) thoroughly before using the
battery.
• Be sure to read and follow the warnings for “The Battery” (F3) thoroughly before using the battery.
C
AC Power Supply
• If the AC Adapter EH-5b and the Power Connector EP-5A (available separately) (E103) are used,
power is supplied to the camera from an electrical outlet, enabling taking and playing back
pictures.
• Do not, under any circumstances, use an AC Adapter other than the EH-5b or a Power Connector
other than the EP-5A. Failure to observe this precaution could result in overheating or in damage
to the camera.
19
Preparation 2 Insert the Battery
1
Open the battery-chamber/memory card slot
cover.
2
Insert the battery.
The Basics of Shooting and Playback
• Use the battery to push the
orange battery latch in the
direction shown (1), and fully
insert the battery (2).
• When the battery is fully inserted,
the battery latch locks it in place.
Battery latch
B
3
20
Inserting the Battery Correctly
Inserting the battery upside down or backwards could damage the camera. Be
sure to confirm that the battery is in the correct orientation.
Close the battery-chamber/memory card slot
cover.
Preparation 2 Insert the Battery
Removing the Battery
Before opening the battery-chamber/memory card slot
cover, turn the camera off (A25) and confirm that the
power-on lamp and the monitor are off.
To eject the battery, open the battery-chamber/memory
card slot cover and slide the orange battery latch in the
direction shown (1). Then, remove the battery straight
(2).
The Basics of Shooting and Playback
B
High Temperature Caution
The camera, battery, and memory card may be hot immediately after using the camera. Observe
caution when removing the battery or memory card.
21
Preparation 3 Insert a Memory Card
1
Confirm that the power-on lamp and the
monitor are turned off and open the batterychamber/memory card slot cover.
• Be sure to turn off the camera before opening the cover.
2
Insert the memory card.
The Basics of Shooting and Playback
• Slide the memory card until it clicks into
place.
B
Inserting the Memory Card
Correctly
Inserting the memory card upside down
or backwards could damage the camera
or the memory card. Be sure to confirm that
the memory card is in the correct orientation.
3
B
Close the battery-chamber/memory card slot
cover.
Formatting a Memory Card
• The first time you insert a memory card that has been used in another device into this camera, be
sure to format it with this camera.
• All data stored on a memory card is permanently deleted when the card is formatted. Be
sure to make copies of any data you wish to keep before formatting the memory card.
• To format a memory card, insert the memory card into the camera, press the d button and
select Format card from the setup menu (A104).
B
22
Note on Memory Cards
Refer to the documentation included with the memory card, as well as “The Memory Cards” (F5) in
“Caring for the Products”.
Preparation 3 Insert a Memory Card
Removing Memory Cards
Before opening the battery-chamber/memory card slot
cover, turn the camera off and confirm that the poweron lamp and the monitor are off.
Press the memory card in lightly with your finger (1) to
partially eject it, and then pull it out straight (2).
B
High Temperature Caution
The camera, battery, and memory card may be hot immediately after using the camera. Observe
caution when removing the battery or memory card.
Internal Memory and Memory Cards
Approved Memory Cards
The following Secure Digital (SD) memory cards have been tested and approved
for use in this camera.
• When recording a movie onto a memory card, a memory card with an SD speed
class of Class 6 or higher is recommended. If the transfer speed of the card is
slow, the movie recording may end unexpectedly.
SD memory cards1
SDHC memory cards2
SanDisk
2 GB
4 GB, 8 GB, 16 GB, 32 GB 64 GB
TOSHIBA
2 GB
4 GB, 8 GB, 16 GB, 32 GB 64 GB
Panasonic
2 GB
4 GB, 8 GB, 12 GB,
16 GB, 32 GB
Lexar
-
4 GB, 8 GB, 16 GB, 32 GB -
1
2
3
The Basics of Shooting and Playback
Camera data, including images and movies, can be saved in either the camera’s
internal memory (approximately 94 MB) or on a memory card. To use the camera’s
internal memory for shooting or playback, first remove the memory card.
SDXC memory cards3
48 GB, 64 GB
Before using a card reader or similar device, check that the device supports 2 GB cards.
SDHC-compliant. Before using a card reader or similar device, check that the
device supports SDHC.
SDXC-compliant. Before using a card reader or similar device, check that the
device supports SDXC.
• Contact the manufacturer for details on the above cards.
23
Step 1 Turn the Camera On
1
Press the power switch to turn on the camera.
• If you are turning the camera on for the first time,
see “Setting the Display Language, Date, and
Time” (A26).
• The lens extends, and the monitor is turned on.
2
Check the battery level and number of exposures remaining.
Battery level indicator
The Basics of Shooting and Playback
1/250
F5.6
38
Number of exposures
remaining
Battery Level
Display
Description
b
Battery level high.
B
Battery level low. Prepare to charge or replace the battery.
N
Battery exhausted.
Cannot take pictures.
Charge or replace the battery.
Number of Exposures Remaining
The number of exposures remaining is displayed.
• When a memory card is not inserted, C is displayed and pictures are recorded to the
internal memory (approx. 94 MB).
• The number of pictures that can be stored depends on the remaining capacity of the
internal memory or memory card, the image quality, and the image size (A78).
• The number of exposures remaining shown in the illustration differs from the actual
value.
24
Step 1 Turn the Camera On
Turning the Camera On and Off
• When the camera is turned on, the power-on lamp (green) lights and the
monitor is turned on (the power-on lamp turns off when the monitor is turned
on).
• To turn off the camera, press the power switch. Both the monitor and the
power-on lamp are turned off.
• To turn on the camera in playback mode, press and hold the c (playback)
button. At this time, the lens does not extend.
Power Saving Function (Auto Off)
If no operations are performed for a while, the monitor will turn off, the camera will enter standby
mode, and the power-on lamp will blink. If no operations are performed for another three minutes,
the camera will turn off automatically.
To turn on the monitor again in standby mode, perform either one of the following operations.
• Press the power switch, shutter-release button or the c button.
• Rotate the mode dial.
The Basics of Shooting and Playback
C
Blinks
No operations
performed.
No operations
performed.
3 min
1/250
F5.6
38
Camera enters
standby mode.
Camera turns off.
• The time that elapses before the camera enters standby mode can be changed using the Auto off
setting in the setup menu (A104).
• By default, the camera enters standby mode in about one minute when you are using shooting
mode or playback mode.
• If you are using the optional AC Adapter EH-5b, the camera enters standby mode after 30 minutes.
This setting cannot be changed.
25
Step 1 Turn the Camera On
Setting the Display Language, Date, and Time
Dialogs for language selection and camera clock setting are displayed the first time
the camera is turned on.
1
Press the multi selector H or I
to choose the desired language
and press the k button.
Language
Multi selector
The Basics of Shooting and Playback
2
Press H or I to choose Yes and press the k
button.
• To cancel setting, select No.
Čeština
Dansk
Deutsch
English
Español
Ελληνικά
Cancel
Time zone and date
Choose time zone and
set date and time?
Yes
No
Cancel
3
Press J or K to select your
home time zone (Time zone),
and press the k button.
London
Casablanca
• See “Daylight Saving Time” (A27) for
more information.
Back
4
26
Press H or I to choose the date display order
and press the k button or K.
Date format
Year/Month/Day
Month/Day/Year
Day/Month/Year
Step 1 Turn the Camera On
5
Press H, I, J or K to set date and time, and
press the k button.
Date and time
D
M
Y
• To choose an item: Press K or J (selected in the
15
11
2011
following order: D (day) ➝ M (month) ➝ Y (year) ➝
15
10
hour ➝ minute).
• To set the contents: Press H or I. Date and time can
Edit
also be set by rotating the command dial.
• Finish setting: Choose minute, and press the k button or K.
• After finishing the setting, the lens extends and the shooting screen is displayed.
Daylight Saving Time
London
Casablanca
Back
C
Changing the Language Setting and the Date and Time Setting
• You can change these settings using the Language and Time zone and date settings in z setup
menu (A104).
• In the Time zone setting of Time zone and date in z setup menu, when the daylight saving
time function is enabled, the camera’s clock is set forward by one hour, and when disabled, set
back by one hour. When the x travel destination is set, the camera automatically calculates the
time difference between the travel destination and the w home time zone, and saves images
using the date and time of the travel destination.
• If you exit without setting the date and time, O blinks when the shooting screen is displayed. Use
the Time zone and date setting in the setup menu (A104) to set the date and time.
C
The Basics of Shooting and Playback
If daylight saving time is in effect, press the multi selector
H to enable the daylight saving time function while
setting the region in step 3.
W is displayed at the top of the monitor.
Press I to disable the daylight saving time function.
The Clock Battery
• The camera’s clock is powered by a backup battery that is separate from the camera’s main
battery.
• The backup battery charges after about ten hours of charging when the main battery is inserted
into the camera or when the camera is connected to an optional AC adapter, and can store the set
date and time for several days.
• If the camera’s backup battery becomes exhausted, the date and time setting screen is displayed
when the camera is turned on. Set the date and time again. See step 2 of “Setting the Display
Language, Date, and Time” (A26) for more information.
C
Imprinting the Shooting Date in Printed Images
• Set the date and time before shooting.
• You can imprint the shooting date in images as they are captured by setting Print date in the
setup menu (A104).
• If you want the shooting date to be printed without using the Print date setting, print using the
included ViewNX 2 software (A92).
27
Step 2 Select a Shooting Mode
Rotate the mode dial to select the shooting mode.
• The following describes how to take pictures in A (auto) mode as an example.
Rotate the mode dial to A.
Auto mode
The Basics of Shooting and Playback
• The camera switches to A (auto) mode and the shooting mode icon changes
to A.
Shooting mode icon
1/250
F5.6
• See “The Monitor” (A8) for more information.
28
38
Step 2 Select a Shooting Mode
Available Shooting Modes
A (Auto) mode
A38
Shoot with basic camera operations.
y (Scene) mode
A39
When one of the scene modes is selected, pictures are captured using settings
that are optimized for the selected scene. In scene auto selector mode, the camera
automatically selects the optimum scene mode for simpler shooting.
u Special effects mode
A46
Effects can be applied to pictures during shooting. Ten different effects are
available.
A49
Shoot with the ISO sensitivity controlled automatically to a high level and without
the flash, to capture the atmosphere of a low-lit scene.
A, B, C, D modes
A51
Choose these modes for greater control over shutter speed and aperture value.
E, F, N User settings modes
A57
Up to three setting combinations that are frequently used for shooting can be
saved in E, F and N. The saved settings can be immediately retrieved for
shooting simply by rotating the mode dial to E, F or N.
D (Movie) mode
A98
The Basics of Shooting and Playback
O Low noise night mode
Movies can be recorded with sound.
C
Note on the Flash
When the flash is lowered, the flash setting is fixed at off and W is displayed at the top of the monitor.
In situations where a flash is needed, such as in dark locations or when the subject is backlit, be sure
to raise the flash (A7).
C
Features That Are Available in Shooting Mode
• The functions of the multi selector H (m), I (p), J (n) or K (G) can be set.
See “Features That Can Be Set Using the Multi Selector” (A60) for more information.
• See “Features That Can Be Set Using the Exposure Compensation Dial ” for more information on
exposure compensation (A71).
• See “Features That Can Be Set with the Quick Menu” for more information on available quick menu
(A73).
• Press the d button to display the menu for the selected shooting mode. See “Shooting
Features” (A37) for more information about the settings available in the menu for the current
shooting mode.
29
Step 3 Frame a Picture
1
Ready the camera.
• Keep your fingers, hair, strap and other objects away from the lens, flash, AF-assist
illuminator and microphone.
• To shoot in the “tall” orientation, hold the camera so that the flash is above the lens.
The Basics of Shooting and Playback
2
Frame the picture.
• Position the main subject near the center of the
monitor.
• See “Using the Viewfinder” (A16) for more
information.
1/250
C
F5.6
38
ISO Sensitivity
E (ISO sensitivity, A8) may be displayed on the shooting screen. When E is displayed, the ISO
sensitivity is automatically raised.
C
30
Using a Tripod
• In the following situations, use of a tripod is recommended to avoid the effects of camera shake:
- When shooting in a dark location or with the flash mode (A61) set to W (off)
- When shooting in the telephoto zoom position
• To take a picture with the camera attached to a tripod, set Vibration reduction in the setup
menu (A104) to Off.
Step 3 Frame a Picture
Using the Zoom
Zoom out
Zoom in
Rotate the zoom control to activate the optical zoom.
• To zoom in so that the subject fills a larger area of
the frame, rotate toward g (telephoto zoom
position).
• To zoom out so that the area visible increases in the
frame, rotate toward f (wide-angle position).
• A zoom indicator is displayed at the top of the
monitor when the zoom control is rotated.
Optical
zoom
Digital
zoom
When the camera is already at the maximum optical zoom position, rotating the
zoom control toward g (telephoto zoom position) triggers the digital zoom.
Digital zoom can magnify the subject up to about 4× beyond the maximum
magnification of the optical zoom.
Maximum optical zoom
•
Digital zoom enabled
The focus will be at the center of the frame and the focus area will not be
displayed when the digital zoom is in effect.
C
The Basics of Shooting and Playback
Digital Zoom
Digital Zoom and Interpolation
Unlike the optical zoom, the digital zoom uses a digital imaging process known as interpolation to
magnify images, resulting in slight deterioration of image quality depending on the image size
(A77) and digital zoom magnification.
Interpolation is applied at zoom positions beyond V. When the zoom is increased beyond the V
position, interpolation is initiated and the zoom indicator also turns yellow.
Additionally, V moves right as the image size becomes smaller, allowing you to confirm the zoom
position that can be used to capture still images without image degradation before shooting at the
current image size setting.
When the image size is small
• Using Digital zoom in the setup menu (A104), it is possible to restrict the magnification of the
digital zoom to a range where images do not deteriorate, or to set the digital zoom so that it does
not operate.
C
More Information
• See “Zoom memory” (A56) for more Information.
• See “Zoom speed” (A106) for more Information.
31
Step 4 Focus and Shoot
1
Press the shutter-release button halfway, i.e.,
press the button slightly until you feel
resistance.
The Basics of Shooting and Playback
• When you press the shutter-release button halfway, the
camera sets the focus and exposure (shutter speed and
aperture value). Focus and exposure remain locked
while the shutter-release button is pressed halfway.
• The camera automatically focuses on the subject in the
center focus area. When the subject is in focus, the
focus area lights in green, and the AF/access lamp next
to the viewfinder lights.
• When the digital zoom is in effect, the camera focuses
on the subject at the center of the screen, and the focus
area is not displayed. When the subject is in focus, the
AF/access lamp lights in green.
• When the shutter-release button is pressed halfway and
the focus area blinks red or the AF/access lamp flickers,
the camera is unable to focus. Change the composition
and press the shutter-release button halfway again.
2
1/250
F5.6
Press the shutter-release button all the way,
i.e., press the button the rest of the way down.
• The shutter is released and the picture is recorded.
• If you press the shutter-release button with too much
force, the camera may shake, causing images to be
blurred. Press the button gently.
B
32
During Recording
• While the AF/access lamp or the indicator showing the number of exposures remaining is
blinking, images are being recorded. Do not open the battery-chamber/memory card slot
cover. Cutting the power or removing the memory card in these circumstances could result in
loss of data or in damage to the camera or card.
• Depending on the settings or shooting conditions, the image recording time may take longer
than usual (F11).
Step 4 Focus and Shoot
B
Autofocus
B
The Subject Is Too Close to the Camera
If the camera does not focus, try shooting with p (macro close-up) (A68) in the focus mode, or
Close-up (A42) scene mode.
C
AF-assist Illuminator
In dark places, the AF-assist illuminator (A105) may light when the shutter-release button is
pressed halfway.
C
To Make Sure You Do Not Miss a Shot
The Basics of Shooting and Playback
Autofocus may not perform as expected in the following situations. In some rare cases, the subject
may not be in focus despite the fact that the active focus area or AF/access lamp lights in green.
• Subject is very dark
• Objects of sharply differing brightness are included in the scene (e.g. the sun behind the subject
makes that subject appear very dark)
• No contrast between the subject and surroundings (e.g. a portrait subject, wearing a white shirt, is
standing in front of a white wall)
• Several objects are at different distances from the camera (e.g., an animal inside a cage)
• Subjects that repeat the same pattern (e.g., as window blinds or buildings lined with windows of
the same shape)
• Subject is moving rapidly
In these situations, try pressing the shutter-release button halfway to refocus several times, or focus
on another subject and use focus lock. When using focus lock, be sure that the distance between the
camera and the subject with which focus was locked is the same as that for the actual subject.
The camera can also be focused using manual focus (E2).
If you are concerned that you might miss a shot, press the shutter-release button all the way without
first pressing it halfway.
C
Focus Lock
Use focus lock to focus on off-center subjects when center is selected for AF area mode.
• Be sure that the distance between the camera and the subject does not change.
• When the shutter-release button is pressed halfway, the exposure is locked.
1/250
F5.6
38
Frame the
subject to be
focused on
using the
camera.
1/250
F5.6
Press the
Confirm that
shutterthe focus area
release button
lights in
halfway.
green.
1/250
F5.6
Continue holding
Press the
down the shuttershutterrelease button release button
halfway and
all the way to
recompose the
shoot.
picture.
Instead of pressing the shutter-release button halfway, you can also press the g (AE-L/AF-L) button
to shoot with focus lock (A107) (except for Scene auto selector (A40) in scene mode).
33
Step 5 Play Back Images
1
Press the c (playback) button.
• When you switch from shooting mode
to playback mode, the last image saved
will be displayed in full-frame playback
mode.
Multi selector
2
c (playback)
button
Use the multi selector to view previous or next images.
To view previous images: H or J
To view next images: I or K
Images can also be selected by rotating the multi selector or command dial.
To return to shooting mode, press the c button again or press the shutter-release
button.
• To play back images that are saved in
15/11/2011 15:30
the internal memory, remove the
0004.JPG
memory card. C is displayed around
“Current image number/total number
Current
of images” on the playback screen.
image
number
Total
4
4
number of
images
The Basics of Shooting and Playback
•
•
•
•
C
Viewing Pictures
• Press the x button to hide or show the shooting information and photo information on the
monitor (A15).
• When the orientation of the camera is changed during playback, the displayed images are rotated
automatically (except when fast forward/rewind is performed).
• Pictures taken in “tall” orientation will be rotated automatically (A106). The rotating direction can
be changed from the Rotate image option in the playback menu (A89).
• Pictures taken using face detection (A85) or pet detection (A45) will be rotated automatically
when displayed in full-frame playback mode according to the orientation of the face (except for
pictures taken when Continuous in the shooting menu or Auto bracketing in the quick menu
(A73) was set).
• Images may be displayed at low resolution immediately after switching to the previous or next
image.
C
34
More Information
• See “Features Available in Playback Mode (Playback Menu)” (A89) for more information.
• See “Selecting Pictures for Playback by Date (List by Date Mode)” (A88) for more information.
Step 5 Play Back Images
Changing How Images Are Displayed
When using playback mode, you can change how images are
displayed by rotating the zoom control toward f (h)/g (i).
Playback Zoom
g
(i)
15/11/2011 15:30
0004.JPG
4
4
f
(h)
Image is displayed in fullframe playback mode.
Display position guide
Image is zoomed in.
The Basics of Shooting and Playback
• To adjust the zoom ratio, rotate the zoom control toward f (h)/g (i).
Images can be zoomed up to 10×.
• To view a different area of the image, press the multi selector H, I, J, or K.
• Pictures taken using face detection (A85) or pet detection (A45) are
enlarged at the center of the face that was detected during shooting (except for
pictures taken when Continuous in the shooting menu (A54) or Auto
bracketing in the quick menu (A73) was set). If the camera detected multiple
faces when the image was captured, use H, I, J, and K to display a different
face. Change the zoom ratio and press H, I, J, or K to zoom in on an area of
the image where there are no faces.
• You can crop the image and save the displayed area of the image as a separate
file by pressing the d button (E19).
• Press the k button to return to full-frame playback mode.
Thumbnail Playback, Calendar Display
f
(h)
15/11/2011 15:30
0004.JPG
1 132
Full-frame playback
mode
g
(i)
1 / 132
f
(h)
g
(i)
Image thumbnail display
(4, 9, 16 and 72 images per screen)
2011 11
1 2 3 4 5
6 7 8 9 10 11 12
13 14 15 16 17 18 19
20 21 22 23 24 25 26
27 28 29 30
3
Calendar display
• You can view several images on one screen, making it easy to find the image you want.
• You can change the number of images displayed by rotating the zoom control
toward f (h)/g (i).
• Rotate the multi selector or press H, I, J, or K to select an image and then
press the k button to display that image in full-frame playback mode.
• When 72 images are displayed, rotate the zoom control toward f (h) to
switch to calendar display.
• While using calendar display mode, rotate the multi selector or press H, I, J,
or K to select a date and then press the k button to display the first image
captured on that day.
35
Step 6 Delete Unwanted Images
1
Press the l button to delete the image
currently displayed on the monitor.
2
Press the multi selector H or I to select Yes
and press the k button.
Erase 1 image?
The Basics of Shooting and Playback
• Deleted images cannot be recovered.
• To cancel, press H or I to select No and press the k
button.
When Delete button options in the setup menu
(A104) is set to Press twice to delete, the image can
be deleted by pressing the l button again while a
confirmation message for deleting an image is displayed.
B
Yes
No
Notes on Deletion
• Deleted images cannot be recovered. Transfer important images to a computer before deleting
them.
• Protected images (A89) cannot be deleted.
• When pictures taken with an Image quality (A75) setting of NRW (RAW) + Fine, NRW (RAW)
+ Normal or NRW (RAW) + Basic are deleted with the l button, both the NRW (RAW) and JPEG
images that were recorded at the same time are deleted.
To delete only NRW (RAW) images or JPEG images, select Erase selected NRW images or Erase
selected JPEG images in Delete of the playback menu (A89).
C
Deleting the Last Image Captured While in Shooting Mode
When using shooting mode, press the l button to delete the last image that was saved.
C
Deleting Multiple Images
To delete multiple images, select Delete from the playback menu (A89).
C
36
Selecting Certain Types of Images for Deletion
Switch to list by date mode (A88) to delete a picture shot on a specified date.
Shooting Features
This chapter describes each of the camera’s shooting modes and the features that
are available when using shooting mode.
By referring to this information, you will learn how to select different shooting
modes and adjust settings according to the shooting conditions and the kind of
images you want to capture.
Shooting Features
Programmed auto
Shooting menu
1/250
F5.6
1342
1/250
F5.6
1342
Custom Picture Control
Metering
Continuous
AF area mode
Autofocus mode
Flash exp. comp.
Noise reduction filter
Flash mode
37
Shooting Features
A (Auto) Mode
Shooting with basic camera operations is available.
• The camera focuses at the center area of the frame.
Changing A (Auto) Mode Settings
Shooting Features
• See “Features That Can Be Set Using the Multi Selector” (A60) for more
information on flash mode (A61), self-timer (A64), smile timer (A65),
remote control (A60) and focus mode (A67).
• See “Features That Can Be Set Using the Exposure Compensation Dial” for more
information on exposure compensation (A71).
• See “Features That Can Be Set with the Quick Menu” for more information on
available quick menu (A73).
C
38
Features That Cannot Be Used Simultaneously
This feature may not be used in combination with certain features (A80).
Scene Mode (Shooting Suited to Scenes)
Press the d button and display the scene menu to select one of the following
scenes. Pictures are captured using settings that are optimized for the selected
scene.
Scene menu
Scene auto selector
Portrait
Landscape
Sports
Night portrait
Party/indoor
Beach
x Scene auto selector (A40)
j Night landscape (A42)
k Close-up (A42)
c Landscape (A40)
u Food (A43)
d Sports (A41)
l Museum (A43)
e Night portrait (A41)
m Fireworks show (A43)
f Party/indoor (A41)
n Black and white copy (A43)
Z Beach (A41)
o Backlighting (A44)
z Snow (A42)
p Panorama assist (A45)
h Sunset (A42)
O Pet portrait (A45)
Shooting Features
b Portrait (A40)
i Dusk/dawn (A42)
C
View a Description (Help Information) of Each Scene
Select the desired scene from the scene menu and rotate the zoom control (A4) toward g (j) to
view a description of that scene (help). To return to the original screen, rotate the zoom control
toward g (j) again.
Changing Scene Mode Settings
• “Features That Can Be Set Using the Multi Selector“ (A60) vary with scene
mode. See “List of the Default Settings” (A69) for more information.
• See “Features That Can Be Set Using the Exposure Compensation Dial” for more
information on exposure compensation (A71).
• See “Features That Can Be Set with the Quick Menu” for more information on
available quick menu (A73).
C
Features That Cannot Be Used Simultaneously
This feature may not be used in combination with certain features (A80).
39
Scene Mode (Shooting Suited to Scenes)
Characteristics of Each Scene
• Use of a tripod is recommended in scenes with which O is indicated. Set
Vibration reduction in the setup menu (A104) to Off when using a tripod to
stabilize the camera.
• For scene modes that use the flash, be sure to press the K (flash pop-up)
button to raise the flash before shooting (A7).
x Scene auto selector
Shooting Features
When you frame a picture, the camera automatically selects the optimum scene for simpler
shooting.
e: Portrait, f: Landscape, h: Night portrait, g: Night landscape, i: Close-up,
j: Backlighting, d: Other scenes
• When the camera automatically selects a scene mode, the shooting mode icon changes
to that for the scene mode currently enabled.
• The camera automatically selects the focus area for autofocus in accordance with the
composition. The camera detects and focuses on faces (see “Using Face Detection”
(A85) for more information).
• Depending upon shooting conditions, the camera may not select the desired scene
mode. Should this occur, switch to A (auto) mode (A28) or select the optimum scene
mode for the subject manually.
• The digital zoom is not available.
b Portrait
Use this mode for portraits.
• The camera detects and focuses on a face (see “Using Face
Detection” (A85) for more information).
• After the skin softening feature makes the subject’s skin
appear smoother, the camera records the image (A86).
• If no faces are detected, the camera focuses on the subject
at the center of the frame.
• The digital zoom is not available.
c Landscape
Use this mode for vivid landscapes and cityscapes.
• When the shutter-release button is pressed halfway, the AF/
access lamp always lights in green.
40
Scene Mode (Shooting Suited to Scenes)
d Sports
Use this mode when shooting sporting events. The camera
captures a series of still images that allow you to clearly see
detailed movements in a moving subject.
• The camera focuses at the center area of the frame.
• To capture a series of images, hold down the shutterrelease button all the way. Up to 90 pictures are shot at a
rate of about 1.2 frames per second (fps) (when image quality is set to Normal and
image size is set to M 3648×2736).
• The camera focuses the subject even when the shutter-release button is not pressed
halfway. You may hear the sound of the camera focusing.
• Focus, exposure, and hue are fixed at the values determined with the first shot in each
series.
• The frame rate with continuous shooting may vary depending upon the current image
quality setting, image size setting, the memory card used, or shooting condition.
e Night portrait
O
Shooting Features
Use this mode for portraits taken at sunset or at night.
• The camera detects and focuses on a face (see “Using Face
Detection” (A85) for more information).
• After the skin softening feature makes facial skin tones
softer, the camera records the image (A86).
• If no faces are detected, the camera focuses on the subject
at the center of the frame.
• Shoot pictures with the flash raised.
• The digital zoom is not available.
f Party/indoor
Suitable for taking pictures in parties. Captures the effects of
candlelight and other indoor background lighting.
• The camera focuses at the center area of the frame.
• When shooting in a dark location, hold the camera steadily
to avoid the effects of camera shake. To take a picture with
the camera attached to a tripod, set Vibration reduction
in the setup menu (A104) to Off.
Z Beach
Captures the brightness of such subjects as beaches or sunlit
expanses of water.
• The camera focuses at the center area of the frame.
41
Scene Mode (Shooting Suited to Scenes)
z Snow
Captures the brightness of sunlit snow.
• The camera focuses at the center area of the frame.
h Sunset
O
Preserves the deep hues seen in sunsets and sunrises.
• The camera focuses at the center area of the frame.
i Dusk/dawn
O
Shooting Features
Preserves the colors seen in the weak natural light before
sunrise or after sunset.
• When the shutter-release button is pressed halfway, the AF/
access lamp always lights in green.
j Night landscape
O
Slow shutter speeds are used to capture the atmosphere of a
night landscape.
• When the shutter-release button is pressed halfway, the AF/
access lamp always lights in green.
k Close-up
Use this mode to photograph flowers, insects, and other small
objects at close range.
• The focus mode (A67) setting is changed to p (macro
close-up) and the camera automatically zooms to the
closest position to the subject where the camera can shoot.
• You can move the focus area that the camera focuses on.
Press the k button and then rotate the multi selector or press H, I, J, or K to move
the focus area. To adjust the following settings, press the k button to temporarily cancel
focus area selection, and then adjust each setting.
- Flash mode or self-timer
• The camera focuses the subject even when the shutter-release button is not pressed
halfway. You may hear the sound of the camera focusing.
42
Scene Mode (Shooting Suited to Scenes)
u Food
Use this mode when taking pictures of food.
• The focus mode (A67) setting is changed to p (macro
close-up) and the camera automatically zooms to the closest
position to the subject where the camera can shoot.
• You can adjust the hue by pressing the multi selector H or
I. The hue adjustment setting is saved in the camera’s
memory even after the camera is turned off.
• You can move the focus area that the camera focuses on.
Press the k button and then rotate the multi selector or
press H, I, J, or K to move the focus area. To adjust the
following settings, press the k button to temporarily cancel
focus area selection, and then adjust each setting.
- Hue or self-timer
• The camera focuses the subject even when the shutterrelease button is not pressed halfway. You may hear the
sound of the camera focusing.
Use indoors where flash photography is prohibited (for
example, in museums and art galleries) or in other settings in
which you do not want to use the flash.
• The camera focuses at the center area of the frame.
• The camera captures up to ten images while the shutterrelease button is pressed all the way, and the sharpest
image in the series is automatically selected and saved (BSS
(Best Shot Selector) (A54)).
m Fireworks show
F5.6
1342
Shooting Features
l Museum
1/250
O
Slow shutter speeds are used to capture the expanding burst
of light from fireworks.
• The camera focuses at infinity.
• When the shutter-release button is pressed halfway, the AF/
access lamp always lights in green.
n Black and white copy
Provides clear images of text or drawings on a white board or
in print.
• The camera focuses at the center area of the frame.
• When shooting nearby object, shoot with p (macro closeup) in the focus mode (A67).
43
Scene Mode (Shooting Suited to Scenes)
o Backlighting
Use when light is coming from behind the subject, throwing features or details into shadow.
On or Off can be selected in HDR (high dynamic range) composition on the screen that is
displayed when o Backlighting scene mode is selected.
• Off (default setting): The flash fires to prevent the backlit
subject from being hidden in shadow.
- Shoot pictures with the flash raised.
- The camera focuses at the center area of the frame.
- Press the shutter-release button all the way to shoot a
single picture.
Shooting Features
44
• On: Use when shooting scenes with high contrast.
- The P icon is displayed on the shooting screen. If
there are very bright areas and very dark areas in the
frame, the P icon lights in green.
- The camera focuses at the center area of the frame.
- When the shutter-release button is pressed all the way,
the camera shoots pictures continuously and saves the
following two images.
- An image processed by D-Lighting (A89) at the time of shooting
- HDR composite image (loss of detail is reduced in highlights and shadows)
- The second image saved is an HDR composite image. If only one image can be saved,
an image processed by D-Lighting is the only image saved.
- Once the shutter-release button is pressed all the way, hold the camera steady without
moving it until a still picture is displayed. After taking a picture, do not turn the camera
off before the monitor switches to the shooting screen.
- Use of a tripod is recommended. Set Vibration reduction in the setup menu (A104)
to Off when using a tripod to stabilize the camera.
- Smear (F3) that occurs on the monitor after shooting will not be recorded with images.
- The digital zoom is not available.
Scene Mode (Shooting Suited to Scenes)
p Panorama assist
Use this mode when shooting a series of pictures that can later be joined on a computer to
form a single panorama.
• Press the multi selector H, I, J or K to select the direction in which pictures are to be
joined and press the k button.
• After shooting the first picture, shoot the necessary number of pictures while confirming
the seams. To finish shooting, press the k button.
• Transfer pictures to a computer and use the included Panorama Maker 5 software
(A92, E4) to join them in a single panorama.
See “Using Panorama Assist” (E3) for more information.
Shooting Features
O Pet portrait
Use this mode for shooting pictures of dogs or cats.
• Select Single or Continuous (three pictures are shot
continuously).
- Single: One picture is captured at a time.
- Continuous (default setting): When the camera focuses
on the detected face in Pet portrait auto release
(default setting) mode, three pictures are shot
continuously (frame rate with continuous shooting: approximately 1.2 frames per
second when image quality is set to Normal and image size is set to M 3648×2736).
If pet portrait auto release is not used, up to 90 pictures are shot at a rate of about 1.2
frames per second while the shutter-release button is fully held down (when image
quality is set to Normal and image size is set to M 3648×2736).
• The camera detects and focuses on the face of a dog or cat. When the subject is in focus,
the shutter is released automatically (Pet portrait auto release (default setting)).
• Up to five pet faces are detected simultaneously.
• If a pet’s face is not detected, press the shutter-release button halfway to focus on the
subject at the center of the frame.
• Press the multi selector J (n) to change the pet portrait auto release settings.
- Pet portrait auto release (default setting): When the camera focuses on the
detected face, the shutter is released automatically. When Pet portrait auto release
is set, the d icon is displayed on the shooting screen.
- OFF: Press the shutter-release button to release the shutter.
• In the following situations, Pet portrait auto release is automatically switched to OFF.
- When pet portrait auto release is repeated five times
- When remaining capacity of the internal memory or memory card is low
To continue shooting with pet portrait auto release, press the multi selector J (n) to set again.
• The digital zoom is not available.
• Under some shooting conditions such as pet-to-camera distance, speed of moving pets,
direction in which the pets are facing, and brightness of the faces, the camera may be unable
to detect a dog or cat, or a border is displayed around something other than a dog or cat.
45
Special Effects Mode (Applying Effects When Shooting)
The effect can be applied to pictures during shooting. One of the 10 special effects
is selected to shoot.
To select an effect, press the d button to display the special effects menu.
Special effects
Special effects
AF area mode
Special effects
Shooting Features
Creative monochrome
Painting
Zoom exposure
Defocus during exposure
Cross process
Soft
Nostalgic sepia
• Special effects can also be selected by rotating the sub-command dial while
pressing the w1 button in the shooting screen.
• The focus area for autofocus differs depending on the setting of AF area mode
that can be selected in the R tab after pressing the d button.
• When AF area mode is set to Auto (default setting), the camera has nine focus
areas, and automatically selects the focus areas containing the subject closest to
the camera. When the subject is in focus, the focus area (active focus area) lights
in green (maximum of nine areas).
Characteristics of Each Special Effect
Option
46
Description
Creative
monochrome
(default setting)
Create monochrome photographs by adjusting the grainy feel and
contrast. Also, the normal color image can be converted into black
and white (solarization).
• Rotate the main command dial to adjust grainy feel.
• Rotate the sub-command dial to adjust contrast.
Painting
Create images with the ambience of paintings.
Special Effects Mode (Applying Effects When Shooting)
Option
Description
Defocus during
exposure*
When the shooting mode icon lights in green, create pictures by
varying focus slightly between the shutter-release button being
pressed and the picture being shot.
• The desired shooting effect is not produced when the subject is
bright and the shutter speed cannot be slowed.
Cross process
Create images with an unusual hue by converting a positive color
image into negative or negative color image into positive.
• Rotate the main command dial to select hue.
• Rotate the sub-command dial to set peripheral light intensity to
on or off.
Soft
Soften the image by adding a slight blur to the overall image.
Nostalgic sepia
Add a sepia tone and reduces the contrast to simulate the qualities
of an old photograph.
High key
Give the overall image a bright tone.
Low key
Give the overall image a dark tone.
Shooting Features
Zoom exposure*
When the shooting mode icon lights in green, create dynamic
pictures radiated out from the center by zooming from f (wideangle position) to g (telephoto zoom position) after the shutter is
open and until it is closed.
• The zoom is fixed at f (wide-angle) end.
• The shutter speed is fixed at one second.
• Rotate the main command dial to switch zooming
magnifications (2× or 3× (default setting)).
• The desired shooting effect is not produced when the subject is
bright and the shutter speed cannot be slowed.
Create a black and white image in which only the specified color
remains.
• Rotate the main command dial to select a color to be retained.
* Use of a tripod is recommended. Vibration reduction in the setup menu (A104) is fixed
at Off.
Selective color
47
Special Effects Mode (Applying Effects When Shooting)
Changing Special Effects Mode Settings
• Features that can be set using the main command dial and sub-command dial
differ depending on the special effects (A47).
• Features that can be set using the multi selector (A60) vary with special
effects. See “List of the Default Settings” (A69) for more information.
• See “Features That Can Be Set Using the Exposure Compensation Dial” for more
information on exposure compensation (A71).
• See “Features That Can Be Set with the Quick Menu” for more information on
available quick menu (A73).
• See “Options Available in the Special Effects Menu” (below) for more
information on functions that can be set using the d button.
Options Available in the Special Effects Menu
In the special effects mode, the following option settings can be changed.
Shooting Features
Select special effects mode M d button M R tab (A13)
Option
AF area mode
Description
Choose how the focus area is determined from Face
priority, Auto (default setting), Manual, Center (spot),
Center (normal), or Center (wide).
• The AF area mode can also be selected by pressing the
multi selector K (G).
C
48
Features That Cannot Be Used Simultaneously
This feature may not be used in combination with certain features (A80).
A
E48
Low Noise Night Mode (Shooting Low-lit Scenes)
B
Shooting Features
The ISO sensitivity is controlled automatically to a high
level. This allows you to capture the atmosphere of a
low-lit scene and shoot pictures with a low amount of
noise without using the flash. It also reduces the effects
of camera shake and subject movement when shooting
at the telephoto zoom position.
• The ISO sensitivity is set automatically within the range of ISO 400 to 12800.
• To use the flash, raise the flash.
• The focus area for autofocus differs depending on the setting of AF area mode
that can be selected in the O tab after pressing the d button.
• When AF area mode is set to Auto (default setting), the camera has nine focus
areas, and automatically selects the focus areas containing the subject closest to
the camera. When the subject is in focus, the focus area (active focus area) lights
in green (maximum of nine areas).
Notes on Low Noise Night Mode
• Although vibration is reduced even in low-lit environments, a tripod is recommended when not
using a flash. Set Vibration reduction (A105) to Off when using a tripod to stabilize the camera.
• The picture taken may be grainy, because the shooting is performed with ISO sensitivity set to a
high level.
• The appropriate exposure may not be obtained (overexposure) in clear sunlight, because the
shooting is always performed at ISO 400 or higher.
• The camera may be unable to focus in extremely dark environments.
• The slowest shutter speed is restricted to 1/4 second.
• In low noise night mode, the available image size (A73) is C 2048×1536 or smaller.
C
Built-in ND Filter
When the subject is too bright, set Built-in ND filter in the setup menu (A104) to reduce the light
and shoot.
C
More Information
See “Autofocus” (A33) for more information.
49
Low Noise Night Mode (Shooting Low-lit Scenes)
Changing Low Noise Night Mode Settings
• See “Features That Can Be Set Using the Multi Selector” (A60) for more
information on flash mode (A61), self-timer (A64)/smile timer (A65)/
remote control (A60), focus mode (A67) and AF area mode.
• See “Features That Can Be Set Using the Exposure Compensation Dial” for more
information on exposure compensation (A71).
• See “Features That Can Be Set with the Quick Menu” for more information on
available quick menu (A73).
• See “Options Available in the Low Noise Night Mode Menu” (below) for more
information on functions that can be set using the d button.
Options Available in the Low Noise Night Mode Menu
In the low noise night mode, the following option
settings can be changed.
Low noise night mode
Shooting Features
Continuous
Flash exp. comp.
Metering
AF area mode
Select low noise night mode M d button M O tab (A13)
The settings of Continuous, Flash exp. comp. and Metering in low noise night
menu are stored in the camera’s memory independently and is not applied to the
settings in any other shooting mode. When the camera is turned off or switched to
another shooting mode, AF area mode is reset to Auto.
Option
A
E45
Flash exp. comp.
Adjust the flash output.
E52
Metering
Choose how the camera meters the brightness of the
subject. Determines the exposure (combination of shutter
speed and aperture value) according to the measured
brightness.
E44
AF area mode
Set how the camera selects the AF area mode to Face
priority, Auto (default setting), Manual, Center (spot),
Center (normal), Center (wide) or Subject tracking.
• The AF area mode can also be selected by pressing the
multi selector K (G).
E48
Continuous
C
50
Description
Continuous shooting can be set. Choose Single or
Continuous.
Features That Cannot Be Used Simultaneously
This feature may not be used in combination with certain features (A80).
A, B, C, D Modes (Setting the Exposure for Shooting)
Pictures can be shot with greater control by setting the
quick menu (A73) or shooting menu (A54) items in
addition to setting the shutter speed or aperture value
manually according to shooting conditions and
requirements.
• The focus area for autofocus differs depending on
the setting of AF area mode that can be selected in the A, B, C or D tab after
pressing the d button.
When AF area mode is set to Auto (default setting), the camera has nine focus
areas, and automatically selects the focus areas containing the subject closest to
the camera. When the subject is in focus, the focus area (active focus area) lights
in green (maximum of nine areas).
Shooting Features
The procedure for shooting pictures at the desired brightness (exposure) by
adjusting the shutter speed or aperture value is called “determine exposure”.
The sense of dynamism and amount of background defocus in pictures to be shot
vary depending on the combinations of shutter speed and aperture value even if
the exposure is the same.
Rotate the command dial to set the shutter speed and aperture value.
1/250
F5.6
Shutter speed
Main command dial
Exposure mode
Sub-command dial
Shutter speed (A83)
1342
Aperture
value
Aperture value (A52)
A
Programmed auto
(A53)
Automatically adjusted (flexible program is enabled by the main
command dial).
B
Shutter-priority
auto (A53)
Adjusted by the main
command dial.
Automatically adjusted.
C
Aperture-priority
auto (A53)
Automatically adjusted.
Adjusted by the sub-command
dial.
Adjusted by the main
command dial.
Adjusted by the sub-command
dial.
D Manual (A53)
51
A, B, C, D Modes (Setting the Exposure for Shooting)
Adjusting the Shutter Speed
Faster
1/1000 s
Slower
1/30 s
Adjusting the Aperture Value
Shooting Features
Larger aperture
(Small f-number)
f/2.8
C
Smaller aperture
(Large f-number)
f/8
Aperture and zoom
The aperture value (f-number) indicates the lens brightness. Large apertures (expressed by small
f-numbers) let more light into the camera, and small apertures (large f-numbers) let less light.
The aperture value of this camera zoom lens can be changed depending on the zoom position.
When zooming to the wide-angle position and telephoto zoom position, the aperture values are f/
2.8 and f/5.6, respectively.
• When Fixed aperture (A106) is set to On, zooming can be performed with minimum changes
in the aperture value.
C
Built-in ND Filter
When the subject is too bright, set Built-in ND filter in the setup menu (A104) to reduce the light
and shoot.
C
52
E, F or N (User Setting) Mode
Even when the mode dial is set to E, F or N (user setting) mode, you can shoot in A
(Programmed auto), B (Shutter-priority auto), C (Aperture-priority auto) or D (Manual). The setting
combinations (user settings) that are frequently used for shooting can be saved in E, F and N
(E58).
A, B, C, D Modes (Setting the Exposure for Shooting)
A (Programmed auto) (E5)
Use for automatic control of the exposure by the camera.
• Different combinations of shutter speed and aperture
value can be selected without changing the exposure
by rotating the main command dial (“flexible
program”). While flexible program is in effect, a
1342
1/125 F5.6
flexible program mark (A) is displayed next to the
mode indicator (A) in the upper left of the monitor.
• To cancel flexible program, rotate the main command dial until the flexible
program mark (A) is no longer displayed, or press the AE-L/AF-L button while
pressing the w1 button. Selecting another shooting mode, or turning off the
camera, also cancels flexible program.
B (Shutter-priority auto) (E5)
1/125
F5.6
1342
1/250
F5.6
1342
C (Aperture-priority auto) (E5)
Shooting Features
Use to shoot fast moving subjects with a fast shutter
speed, or use to emphasize the movements of a
moving subject with a slow shutter speed.
• The shutter speed can be adjusted by rotating the
main command dial.
Use to blur the background or bring both the
foreground and background into focus.
• The aperture value can be adjusted by rotating the
sub-command dial.
D (Manual) (E7)
Use to control the exposure according to shooting
requirements.
• When adjusting the aperture value or shutter speed,
the degree of deviation from the exposure value
measured by the camera is displayed in the exposure
1/125 F5.6
1342
indicator. The degree of deviation in the exposure
indicator is displayed in EVs (–3 to +3 EV in
Exposure indicator
increments of 1/3 EV).
• When the degree of deviation of the exposure value is below –2 EV or above +2
EV, the exposure indicator is displayed in red.
• The shutter speed can be adjusted by rotating the main command dial and the
aperture value can be adjusted by rotating the sub-command dial.
53
A, B, C, D Modes (Setting the Exposure for Shooting)
Changing A, B, C, D Modes
• See “Features That Can Be Set Using the Multi Selector” (A60) for more
information on flash mode (A61), self-timer (A64)/smile timer (A65)/
remote control (A60) and focus mode (A67), AF area mode.
• See “Features That Can Be Set Using the Exposure Compensation Dial” for more
information on exposure compensation (A71).
• See “Features That Can Be Set with the Quick Menu” for more information on
available quick menu (A73).
• See “Options Available in the Shooting Menu” (below) for more information on
functions that can be set using the d button.
Options Available in the Shooting Menu
In the A, B, C, D mode, the following option settings
can be changed.
Shooting Features
Custom Picture Control
Metering
Continuous
AF area mode
Autofocus mode
Flash exp. comp.
Noise reduction filter
Select A, B, C, D mode M d button M A, B, C, D tab (A13)
Description
A
Custom Picture
Control
Allow you to store the settings customized in COOLPIX
Picture Controls, which can set picture editing options for
recording images according to the shooting scene or your
preferences.
E43
Metering
Select the method that the camera uses to measure the
brightness of the subject. The camera adjusts the
E44
exposure, which is a combination of shutter speed and
aperture value, based on the brightness measurement. The
default setting is Matrix.
Continuous
Select the mode used for taking a series of pictures from
Single, Continuous, Continuous flash, BSS (A43),
Multi-shot 16, and Intvl timer shooting. The default
setting is Single (i.e., only one picture is captured at a
E45
time). Allow you to shoot up to 90 pictures at a rate of
about 1.2 frames per second while Continuous is selected
and the shutter-release button is fully held down (when
image quality is set to Normal and image size is set to M
3648×2736).
Option
54
Shooting menu
A, B, C, D Modes (Setting the Exposure for Shooting)
A
AF area mode
E48
Autofocus mode
When Single AF (default setting) is selected, the camera
focuses only while the shutter-release button is pressed
halfway. When Full-time AF is selected, the camera
focuses even when the shutter-release button is not
pressed halfway. You may hear the sound of the camera
focusing.
E52
Flash exp. comp.
Flash compensation is used to adjust the flash output,
changing the brightness of the main subject relative to the E52
background. The default setting is 0.0.
Noise reduction
filter
Set the strength of the noise reduction function that is
normally performed when recording the picture. The
default setting is Normal.
Long exposure NR
At slow shutter speeds, pictures may be affected by “noise”
in the form of randomly-spaced, brightly-colored dots
E53
concentrated in dark parts of the image. Reduce noise at
slow shutter speeds. The default setting is Auto.
Distortion control
Choose whether to correct the peripheral distortion that
occurs due to the intrinsic characteristics of lenses.
Enabling distortion control reduces the size of the frame, as E54
compared to when distortion control is not enabled. The
default setting is Off.
Wide-angle
converter
Set the option to On when using the Wide-angle
Converter WC-E75A (available separately). The default
setting is None.
E54
Flash control
Set the built-in flash to off even when you are not using a
Speedlight (external flash unit) attached to the camera’s
accessory shoe. The default setting is Auto.
E55
Active D-Lighting
Prevent loss of contrast details in highlights and shadows
when shooting images. The default setting is Off.
E56
E53
Shooting Features
Description
Set how the camera selects the AF area mode to Face
priority, Auto (default setting), Manual, Center (spot),
Center (normal), Center (wide) or Subject tracking.
• The AF area mode can also be selected by pressing the
multi selector K (G).
Option
55
A, B, C, D Modes (Setting the Exposure for Shooting)
Option
Zoom memory
Description
A
When the zoom control is operated while pressing the
w1 button, the camera changes in steps to the focal
length (equivalent to 35mm [135] format of angle of view)
of the zoom lens that is set in advance.
• The default setting is on w for all the check boxes.
E57
Shooting Features
C
56
Features That Cannot Be Used Simultaneously
This feature may not be used in combination with certain features (A80).
E, F and N (User Setting Modes)
Up to three setting combinations that are frequently used for shooting (user
settings) can be saved in E, F and N. Shooting is possible in A (Programmed
auto), B (Shutter-priority auto), C (Aperture-priority auto) or D (Manual).
Rotate the mode dial to E, F or N to retrieve the
settings saved in Save user settings.
• Frame the subject and shoot with these settings, or
change the settings as required.
• The setting combinations that are retrieved when
the mode dial is rotated to E, F or N can be
changed as many times as you want in Save user settings.
• See E58 for more information on the Save user settings.
• See “Features That Can Be Set Using the Multi Selector” (A60) for more
information on flash mode (A61), self-timer (A64)/smile timer (A65)/
remote control (A60) and focus mode (A67), AF area mode
• See “Features That Can Be Set Using the Exposure Compensation Dial” for more
information on exposure compensation (A71).
• See “Features That Can Be Set with the Quick Menu” for more information on
available quick menu (A73).
• See “Available Specialized Menu for E, F or N” (A58) and “Options
Available in the Shooting Menu” (A54) for more information on functions that
can be set using the d button.
Shooting Features
Changing E, F or N Mode Settings
57
E, F and N (User Setting Modes)
Available Specialized Menu for E, F or N
Following settings can be changed in E, F or N
mode.
User settings
Save user settings
Reset user settings
Shooting mode
Focal length (35mm equiv.)
Photo info
Virtual horizon display
Initial monitor display
Set to E, F or N mode M d button M E, F or N tab (A13)
Option
Shooting Features
58
A
Description
Save user
settings
The current settings are stored.
E58
Reset user
settings
The settings saved to E, F or N are reset.
E59
Shooting mode
Choose the standard shooting mode (default setting is A). The
current flexible program (when set to A), shutter speed (when
29
set to B or D) or aperture value (when set to C or D) settings
are also saved.
Focal length
(35mm equiv.)
Set the zoom position for when the mode dial is set. Choose
28 mm (default setting), 35 mm, 50 mm, 85 mm, 105 mm,
135 mm, 200 mm or Current zoom position.
-
Photo info
Set the information displayed on the monitor when the mode
dial is set. This setting is not applied to the setup menu
settings.
E74
Virtual horizon
display
Set the virtual horizon display for when the mode dial is set.
This setting is not applied to the setup menu settings.
E74
Initial monitor
display
Set the information displayed on the monitor when the mode
dial is set (default setting is Show info).
15
Flash mode
Set the flash mode for when the mode dial is set.
61
Focus
Set the focus mode for when the mode dial is set. The current
focus distance is also saved when the focus mode is E
(manual focus).
67
E, F and N (User Setting Modes)
Description
A
AF area mode
Set the AF area mode for when the mode dial is set. The
current focus area position is saved when AF area mode is set
to Manual.
E48
AF assist
Enable or disable the AF assist mode for when the mode dial is
E78
set. This setting is not applied to the setup menu settings.
Option
Shooting Features
59
Features That Can Be Set Using the Multi Selector
Press the multi selector H (m), J (n), I (D), or K (G) while shooting to operate
the following functions.
m Flash mode (A61)
n Self-timer (A64)/
Smile timer (A65)/
Remote control
G AF area mode
D Focus mode (A67)
Available Functions
Shooting Features
Available functions differ according to the shooting mode as follows.
• See “List of the Default Settings” (A69) for more information on the default
settings in each shooting mode.
3
60
w
w
-
w
w
w
-
w
w
w
-
w
w
w
w
w
w
w
w
-
w
w
-
Flash mode (A61)
w
Self-timer (A64)
Smile timer (A65)
Remote control1
D
Focus mode (A67)
G
AF area mode2
n
2
D
y u O
m
1
A, B, C, D,
E, F, N
A
Function
3
3
Use the Remote Control ML-L3 (available separately) to release the shutter (E105). It is
convenient for taking self-portraits of group shots and effectively eliminating blur caused
by camera shake that occurs when the shutter-release button is pressed.
Set the method of how to change the focus area for autofocus (A54). Set Multi selector
right press to Off in the setup menu (A104) if you do not want to display the selected
focus area when the multi sector K is pressed.
The setting varies with scene mode or special effects. See “List of the Default Settings”
(A69) for more information.
Features That Can Be Set Using the Multi Selector
Using the Flash (Flash Modes)
You can shoot pictures with a flash by raising the built-in flash. You can set a flash
mode that suits the shooting conditions.
1
Press the K (flash pop-up) button to raise the flash (A7).
• When the flash is lowered, the flash mode is fixed at W (off ).
2
3
Press H (m flash mode) on the multi selector.
Press the multi selector to select the desired
mode and press the k button.
4
Shooting Features
• See “Available Flash Modes” (A62) for more
information.
• When the manual flash is selected, press K before
pressing the k button and select the flash output.
Flash mode
• When Y (slow sync) or Z (rear-curtain sync) is
selected for flash mode, the flash mode can be
switched by pressing K before pressing the k button.
• If the k button is not pressed within a few seconds, the
selection is set and the setting menu disappears.
• When U (auto) is applied, D is only displayed for a few seconds even if monitor
indicators (A15) are turned on.
Frame the subject and take a picture.
• The flash lamp indicates the status of the flash when
the shutter-release button is pressed halfway.
- On: The flash will fire when you press the shutterrelease button all the way.
- Blinking: The flash is charging. The camera cannot
take pictures.
- Off: The flash will not fire when a picture is taken.
• If the battery is low, the monitor will be turned off while
the flash is charging.
C
Lowering the Flash
When not using the flash, gently push to lower the flash until it clicks shut (A7).
C
Effective Range of the Built-in Flash
The built-in flash has a range of about 0.3 to 9.0 m (1 ft to 29 ft) for wide-angle position, and about
0.3 to 4.5 m (1 ft to 14 ft) for telephoto zoom position (when ISO sensitivity is set to Auto).
61
Features That Can Be Set Using the Multi Selector
Available Flash Modes
U
Auto
Flash fires automatically when lighting is dim.
V
Auto with red-eye reduction
Best choice for portraits. Reduces red-eye effect caused by flash in portraits (A63).
W
Off
Flash does not fire.
• Available when the scene mode is x (scene auto selector) or an optional
Speedlight (external flash unit) is attached.
• Use of a tripod is recommended to avoid the effects of camera shake when
shooting in a dark location.
X
Fill flash
The flash fires when a picture is taken, regardless of how bright the subject is. Use to
“fill-in” (illuminate) shadows and backlit subjects.
Shooting Features
S
Manual
Flash is forcibly fired at the flash output that is set for the built-in flash.
• Choose the flash output from SFull (full flash), S1/2, S1/4, S1/8, S1/16,
S1/32 and S1/64. For example, when S1/16 is chosen, the flash is 1/16 of the
full flash.
• Not available when a Speedlight flash unit (available separately) is attached.
Y
Slow sync /Z Rear-curtain sync
• Slow sync:
Fill flash is combined with a slow shutter speed.
Suitable for portraits of human subjects shot at night or under dim light. Flash
illuminates main subject; slow shutter speeds are used to capture background.
• Rear-curtain sync:
Fill flash fires just before the shutter closes, creating the effect of a stream of light
behind moving subjects.
C
62
Flash Mode Setting
• The setting varies with shooting mode. See “Available Functions” (A60) and “List of the Default
Settings” (A69) for more information.
• This feature may not be used in combination with certain features. See “Features That Cannot Be
Used Simultaneously” (A80).
• The changed flash mode setting applied in the following situations is saved in the camera’s
memory even after the camera is turned off.
- When shooting mode A, B, C or D is used
- When V (auto with red-eye reduction) is selected in A (Auto) mode
Features That Can Be Set Using the Multi Selector
C
Auto with Red-eye Reduction
This camera uses advanced red-eye reduction (“In-Camera Red-Eye Fix”).
Pre-flashes are fired repeatedly at low intensity before the main flash, reducing the red-eye effect.
If the camera detects “red-eye” when a picture is taken, Nikon’s own In-Camera Red-Eye Fix processes
the image before it is recorded.
Note the following when taking pictures:
• Because pre-flashes are fired, there is a slight lag between when the shutter-release button is
pressed and when the picture is shot.
• The time required to save the picture increases slightly.
• Advanced red-eye reduction may not produce the desired results in some situations.
• In extremely rare instances, areas not subject to red-eye may be affected by advanced red-eye
reduction processing. In these cases, choose another mode and try again.
• The red-eye reduction process when NRW (RAW) images (A75) are recorded consists only of the
pre-flashing before the main flash (including the JPEG image that is recorded at the same time).
When Red-eye reduction in the setup menu (A104) is set to Pre-flash off, the shutter is released
immediately when the shutter-release button is pressed all the way.
C
External Flash Unit
Shooting Features
You can attach the following Nikon Speedlights on the camera's accessory shoe (A2) to take
pictures.
• Speedlights SB-400, SB-600, SB-700, SB-800, SB-900
• Wireless Speedlight Commander SU-800
63
Features That Can Be Set Using the Multi Selector
Using the Self-timer
The self-timer is suitable for taking group pictures and reducing the vibration when
the shutter-release button is pressed.
When using the self-timer, use of a tripod is recommended. Set Vibration reduction
in the setup menu (A104) to Off when using a tripod to stabilize the camera.
1
Press J (n self-timer) on the multi selector.
2
Use the multi selector to select Y 10s (or
Y 2s) and press the k button.
Shooting Features
• To change the time for self-timer, press K before
pressing the k button.
• Y 10s (ten seconds): suitable for group pictures.
Self-timer
• Y 2s (two seconds): suitable for preventing camera
shake.
• When the shooting mode is set to Pet portrait in scene mode, Y (pet portrait auto
release) is displayed (A45). The self-timer Y 10s and Y 2s are not available.
• The mode selected for the self-timer is displayed.
• If the k button is not pressed within a few seconds, the selection is set and the setting
menu disappears.
3
Frame the picture and press the shutter-release button halfway.
• Set the focus and exposure.
4
Press the shutter-release button all the
way.
• The self-timer starts, and the number of
seconds remaining before the shutter is
released is displayed. The self-timer lamp blinks
while the timer is counting down. About one
second before the shutter is released, the lamp
stops blinking and remains lit.
• When the shutter is released, the self-timer
turns OFF.
• To stop the timer before a picture is taken,
press the shutter-release button again.
C
64
More Information
See “Self-timer: after release” (A104) for more information.
9
1/250
F5.6
Features That Can Be Set Using the Multi Selector
Smile Timer (Shooting Smiling Faces)
When this mode is selected, the camera detects smiling faces and automatically
releases the shutter even if you don’t press the shutter-release button.
• This function can be used when the shooting mode is A (auto), A, B, C, D,
E, F, N, O (low noise night), scene mode Portrait or Night portrait.
1
Press J (n self-timer) on the multi selector.
• Change any flash mode, exposure, or shooting menu
settings before pressing the n button.
2
Use the multi selector to choose a (smile
timer), and press the k button.
• If the k button is not pressed within a few seconds, the
selection is set and the setting menu disappears.
3
Frame the picture and wait for the subject to
smile without pressing the shutter-release
button.
Shooting Features
Smile timer
• When the camera detects a face, a yellow double border
(focus area) is displayed around that face. When the
camera has focused on that face, the double border will
1342
1/250 F5.6
turn green for a moment and focus is locked.
• Up to three faces are detected. When more than one face is detected, the face closest
to the center of the frame is framed by a double border and the others by single
borders.
• If the camera detects that the face framed by the double border is smiling, the shutter
is automatically released.
• Each time the shutter is released, automatic shooting using face detection and smile
detection is repeated.
4
Shooting ends.
• To cancel smile detection and stop shooting, return to step 1 and select OFF.
65
Features That Can Be Set Using the Multi Selector
B
Notes on Smile Timer
• The digital zoom is not available.
• When the smile timer is selected, the monitor is not turned off even when the x button is pressed
(A15).
• Under some shooting conditions, faces and smiling faces may not be detected properly.
• See “Viewing Pictures Taken Using Face Detection” (A85) for more information.
• The smile timer cannot be used simultaneously with certain shooting modes. See “Available
Functions” (A60) and “List of the Default Settings” (A69) for more information.
• This feature may not be used in combination with certain features. See “Features That Cannot Be
Used Simultaneously” (A80) for more information.
C
When the Self-timer Lamp Blinks
When the camera detects a face, the self-timer lamp blinks. The lamp flickers immediately after the
shutter is released.
C
Shooting Features
66
Releasing the Shutter Manually
The shutter can also be released by pressing the shutter-release button. If no faces are detected, the
camera focuses on the subject at the center of the frame.
C
More Information
See “Autofocus” (A33) for more information.
Features That Can Be Set Using the Multi Selector
Using Focus Mode
Choose a focus mode according to the desired scene.
1
Press I (p focus mode) on the multi selector.
2
Use the multi selector to choose the desired
focus mode and press the k button.
Autofocus
Shooting Features
• See “Available Focus Modes” (A68) for more
information.
• If the k button is not pressed within a few seconds, the
selection is set and the setting menu disappears.
• When A (autofocus) is applied, P is only displayed for
a few seconds even if monitor indicators (A15) are
turned on.
67
Features That Can Be Set Using the Multi Selector
Available Focus Modes
Shooting Features
A
Autofocus
The camera automatically adjusts the focus according to the distance to the subject.
Use when the distance from the subject to the lens is 50 cm (1 ft 8 in.) or more, or
80 cm (2 ft 8 in.) or more at the maximum telephoto zoom position.
D
Macro close-up
Use for close-ups of flowers or small objects.
How close you can be to the subject while shooting depends on the zoom ratio.
When the zoom ratio is set to a position where F and the zoom indicator light in
green, the camera can focus on subjects as close as 7 cm (2.8 in.) from the lens. At the
maximum wide-angle zoom position (the zoom position G), the camera can focus
on subjects as close as 2 cm (0.8 in.) from the lens.
B
Infinity
Use when shooting distant scenes through window glass or when shooting landscapes.
When the shutter-release button is pressed halfway, the AF/access lamp always lights
in green. However, the camera may not be able to focus on nearby objects. The flash
mode is set to W (off ).
E
Manual focus
The focus can be adjusted for any subject that is a distance of 2 cm (0.8 in.) to infinity
from the lens (E2). The closest distance at which the camera can focus varies
depending on the zoom position.
• This function can be used when the shooting mode is A, B, C, D, E, F, N,
O (low noise night), special effects mode or scene mode Sports.
B
Note on Shooting with the Flash
When shooting with D (macro close-up), the flash may be unable to light the entire subject at
distances of less than 30 cm (1 ft).
C
Focus Mode Setting
• The setting varies with the shooting mode. See “Available Functions” (A60) and “List of the
Default Settings” (A69) for more information.
• This feature may not be used in combination with certain features. See “Features That Cannot Be
Used Simultaneously” (A80) for more information.
• For shooting modes A, B, C and D, the changed focus mode setting is saved in the camera’s
memory even after the camera is turned off.
C
Macro Close-up
When using A, B, C, D, E, F or N mode if Autofocus mode in the shooting menu (A54) is
set to Full-time AF, or when using D (movie) mode if Autofocus mode in the movie menu (A101)
is set to Full-time AF, the camera will adjust focus even if the shutter-release button is not pressed
halfway.
When using other shooting modes, Full-time AF is turned on automatically when macro mode is
turned on.
You may hear the sound of the camera focusing.
C
68
Infinity
If you set focus mode to infinity while using A (auto) mode, A, B, C, D, E, F or N mode, O
(low noise night) mode or special effects mode, the focus area is not displayed on the screen.
Features That Can Be Set Using the Multi Selector
List of the Default Settings
The default settings in each shooting mode are described below.
• Similar information about scene mode can be found on the next page.
Shooting mode
2
3
4
5
6
7
Self-timer
(A64)
Focus mode
(A67)
AF area mode
(A55)
A
(auto)
(A38)
U
OFF
A2
–
u
(special effects)
(A46)
U3
OFF4
A
w5
O
(low noise night)
(A49)
U
OFF
A
w
A, B, C, D
(A51)
U
OFF
A
w
E, F, N
(user setting)
(A57)
U
OFF
A
w
D
(movie)
(A98)
W6
OFF7
A2
–
Shooting Features
1
Flash mode1
(A61)
When the flash is lowered, the flash mode is fixed at W (off). When using the built-in flash,
W (off) cannot be selected. When using a flash unit (available separately), S (manual)
cannot be selected.
A (autofocus), p (macro close-up) or B (infinity) can be selected.
The flash is fixed at W (off) when in Painting or Zoom exposure.
When Defocus during exposure is selected, W (off) or Y (slow sync) can be selected.
Smile timer cannot be selected.
s (subject tracking) cannot be selected.
The AF area mode is fixed at Center (normal), when Zoom exposure is selected.
The setting cannot be changed.
Quick-response remote can be selected
• The setting applied in shooting modes A, B, C and D is saved in the camera’s
memory even after the camera is turned off (except for self-timer).
69
Features That Can Be Set Using the Multi Selector
Default settings in scene mode are described below.
Flash mode
(A61)
Self-timer
(A64)
Focus mode
(A67)
AF area mode
(A55)
Shooting Features
x (A40)
U1
OFF2
A3
–
b (A40)
V
OFF
A3
–
c (A40)
W3
OFF2
B3
–
d (A41)
W3
OFF3
A4
–
e (A41)
V5
OFF
A3
–
f (A41)
V6
OFF2
A3
–
Z (A41)
U
OFF2
A3
–
z (A42)
U
OFF2
A3
–
h (A42)
W3
OFF2
A3
–
i (A42)
W3
OFF2
B3
–
j (A42)
W3
OFF2
B3
–
k (A42)
U
OFF2
p3
–
u (A43)
W3
OFF2
p3
–
l (A43)
W3
OFF2
A7
–
m (A43)
W3
OFF8
B3
–
n (A43)
U
OFF2
A7
–
o (A44)
X/W9
OFF2
A3
–
p (A45)
U
OFF2
A10
–
O (A45)
W3
Y11
A7
–
1
U (auto) and W (off) can be selected. When U (auto) is selected, the camera
automatically selects the flash mode appropriate for the scene it has selected.
2 Self-timer or remote control can be selected.
3 The setting cannot be changed.
4 A (autofocus) or E (manual focus) can be selected.
5 The setting cannot be changed. The flash mode setting is fixed at fill flash with slow sync
and red-eye reduction.
6 May switch to slow sync with red-eye reduction flash mode.
7 A (autofocus) or D (macro close-up) can be selected.
8 Quick-response remote can be selected.
9 When HDR is set to Off, the flash mode is fixed at X (fill flash).
When HDR is set to On, the flash mode is fixed at W (off).
10 A (autofocus), D (macro close-up) or B (infinity) can be selected.
11 The self-timer is not available. Pet portrait auto release (A45) can be set to on or off.
C
70
Features That Cannot Be Used Simultaneously
This feature may not be used in combination with certain features (A80).
Features That Can Be Set Using the Exposure Compensation Dial
Adjusting Brightness (Exposure Compensation)
When exposure compensation is set for shooting, the brightness of the overall
image can be adjusted to make it brighter or darker.
1
Select the compensation value by rotating the
exposure compensation dial.
• To make the subject brighter: adjust the exposure
compensation value to the “+” side.
• To make the subject darker: adjust the exposure
compensation value to the “–” side.
Exposure compensation
dial mark
1/250
F5.6
1342
Exposure
compensation value
2
Press the shutter-release button to take a picture.
C
Exposure Compensation Value
Shooting Features
• When set to a value other than 0.0, the H mark and
compensation value are displayed on the monitor and
the exposure compensation dial mark turns on when
shooting.
• When the shooting mode is the Fireworks show scene mode (A43) or D (manual) mode
(E7), the exposure compensation cannot be used.
• When recording a movie, the compensation value is not adjusted even when the exposure
compensation dial is rotated.
71
Features That Can Be Set with the Quick Menu
When the quick menu dial is rotated while shooting, the quick menu is displayed
for the function that is selected with the mark. When the quick menu is displayed,
the quick menu dial mark turns on.
• The quick menu is also displayed by pressing the quick menu button.
• To exit the quick menu, press the quick menu button or the shutter-release
button.
Quick menu dial mark
Quick menu dial
Quick menu button
Shooting Features
Available functions differ according to the shooting mode.
Dial
position
a
b
c
d
I
a
C
Function
A
A, B, C, D,
E, F, N
Image quality/Image size
(A73)
Movie options (A73)
ISO sensitivity (A73)
White balance (A73)
Auto bracketing (A73)
My Menu (A73)
Picture Control (A73)
w
w
w
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
w
w
w
w
w
–
–
–
–
–
–
Features That Cannot Be Used Simultaneously
This feature may not be used in combination with certain features (A80).
72
O
D
w
w
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
w
–
–
–
w
–
w
–
–
–
yu
Features That Can Be Set with the Quick Menu
Available Quick Menu
Option
Description
A
74
a
Movie options
Set the desired type of movie.
The default setting is f HD 720p (1280×720).
E42
b
ISO sensitivity
Higher ISO sensitivity allows you to take pictures of darker
subjects. Additionally, even with subjects of similar
brightness, pictures can be taken at faster shutter speeds,
and blurring caused by camera shake and subject
movement can be reduced. When ISO sensitivity is set to
Auto (default setting), the camera sets the ISO sensitivity
automatically.
• In D (manual) mode, ISO sensitivity is fixed at ISO 100 if
Auto, High ISO sensitivity auto, ISO 100-200 or ISO
100-400 is selected.
E30
c
White balance
Adjust colors in the image closer to the colors as they appear
to the eye. Although Auto (normal) (default setting) can be
used under most types of lighting, you can apply the white
balance setting suited to the sky conditions or light source to
achieve better results if the default setting results are
E32
unsatisfactory.
• The preset value for preset manual applies commonly to
A, B, C, D, E, F and N shooting modes, low noise
night mode, and movie mode.
d
Auto bracketing
Continuous shooting can be performed while changing the
exposure (brightness) automatically with the shutter speed
(Tv) or ISO sensitivity (Sv), or multiple images can be
recorded while varying the white balance (WB). The default
setting is OFF.
E36
S
My Menu
Display only the menu items that are frequently used for
shooting.
• Options that are displayed in My Menu can be changed
from Customize My Menu in the setup menu (A104).
E90
a
Picture Control
Change the settings for image recording according to the
shooting scene or your preferences. The default setting is
Standard.
E38
Shooting Features
a
Image quality/
Image size
Set the image quality (compression ratio) and image size to
be recorded (A74). The default setting of image quality is
Normal, and of image size is M 3648×2736.
This setting is also applied to other shooting modes (except
for low noise night mode and shooting modes E, F and
N).
73
Changing the Image Quality and Image Size
Display the shooting screen M a (Quick menu dial) (A72) M Image quality/Image
size
The image quality (compression ratio) and image size can be selected for
recording.
1
Choose the type of image quality (A75) by
pressing the multi selector J or K.
Shooting Features
• Items can also be chosen by rotating the main
command dial.
• To change the image quality only, choose the type of
image quality, and then press the quick menu button.
• To continue and change the image size, press the multi
selector I.
2
Image quality
Image size
1342
3648×2736
Numbers of exposures
remaining
After completing the settings, press the quick menu button or the k
button.
• The monitor display reverts to shooting screen.
74
1342
Normal
Choose the type of image size (A77).
• Image size cannot be selected when NRW (RAW) is
selected for Image quality.
• The number of exposures remaining for the selected
image size is displayed.
• Press the multi selector H to return to the image quality
setting.
3
Image quality
Image size
Changing the Image Quality and Image Size
Available Image Quality
Lower compression ratios result in higher quality pictures, but also larger file sizes,
limiting the number of pictures that can be recorded.
Option
Description
Fine image quality than Normal, suitable for enlargement or
a Fine
high quality prints.
File format: JPEG, compression ratio of about 1:4
Normal (default Normal image quality, suitable for most applications.
b setting)
File format: JPEG, compression ratio of about 1:8
Basic image quality is lower than with Normal, suitable for
pictures attached to e-mails or used on web pages.
c Basic
File format: JPEG, compression ratio of about 1:16
NRW (RAW) +
Fine*
Two images are recorded at the same time: one NRW (RAW)
image and one fine-quality JPEG image.
e
NRW (RAW) +
Normal*
Two images are recorded at the same time: one NRW (RAW)
image and one normal-quality JPEG image.
f
NRW (RAW) +
Basic*
Two images are recorded at the same time: one NRW (RAW)
image and one basic-quality JPEG image.
NRW (RAW)*
Raw data from the image sensor are saved. Create JPEG image
files after shooting using NRW (RAW) processing in the playback
menu (A89).
• When NRW (RAW) is selected, Image size is reset to
M 3648×2736.
File format: NRW (RAW)
F
Shooting Features
d
* NRW (RAW) images cannot be chosen in scene mode, special effects mode (except for Zoom
exposure and Defocus during exposure) or low noise night mode.
75
Changing the Image Quality and Image Size
C
COOLPIX P7100 NRW (RAW) Images
• The extension of the picture taken is “.NRW.”
• NRW (RAW) images cannot be printed. Creating JPEG images with NRW (RAW) processing
enables the images to be printed using PictBridge compatible printers or in digital photo labs.
• No editing other than NRW (RAW) processing can be performed for images in the NRW (RAW)
format. To edit such images, first create JPEG images using NRW (RAW) processing (E17), and
then edit the JPEG images.
• ViewNX 2 needs to be installed on the computer to be able to view NRW (RAW) images on the
computer. Capture NX 2 is also compatible with NRW (RAW) images.
• Install ViewNX 2 on a computer using the included ViewNX 2 CD-ROM. (See “Using ViewNX 2”
(A92).)
For more information on using ViewNX 2, refer to the on-screen instructions and help information
contained in ViewNX 2.
C
Image Quality Setting
Shooting Features
• The setting for image quality is shown by an icon displayed on the monitor during shooting and
playback (A8 to 10).
• The setting is also applied to other shooting modes (except for shooting modes E, F and N).
• NRW (RAW) images cannot be recorded in the following shooting modes.
- Scene mode
- Special effect mode (except for Zoom exposure and Defocus during exposure)
- Low noise night mode
When the mode is changed to scene mode or special effect mode (except for Zoom exposure
and Defocus during exposure) from other shooting modes, the image quality is changed
according to situation as follows.
- When NRW (RAW) is set, the image quality is changed to Normal.
- When NRW (RAW) + Fine, NRW (RAW) + Normal or NRW (RAW) + Basic is set, the image
quality is changed to Fine, Normal or Basic, respectively.
• The digital zoom cannot be used when Image quality is set to NRW (RAW), NRW (RAW) + Fine,
NRW (RAW) + Normal or NRW (RAW) + Basic.
• This feature may not be used in combination with certain features. See “Features That Cannot Be
Used Simultaneously” (A80) for more information.
C
Recording of NRW (RAW) and JPEG Images at the Same Time
• The NRW (RAW) image and the JPEG image that are recorded at the same time have the same file
number but their own file extensions, “.NRW ” and “.JPG” (E99).
• When playing back on the camera, only the JPEG image is displayed.
• Note that when the JPEG image is deleted by pressing the l button, the NRW (RAW) image that
was recorded at the same time is also deleted.
C
More Information
• See “Number of Exposures Remaining” (A78) for more information.
• See “File and Folder Names” (E99) for more information.
76
Changing the Image Quality and Image Size
Available Image Size
You can set the JPEG image size (amount of pixels) for pictures recorded with an
image quality of Fine, Normal or Basic.
The larger the image, the larger the size at which it can be printed or displayed
without becoming noticeably “grainy,” limiting the number of pictures that can be
recorded.
Conversely, small image sizes are suitable for pictures attached to e-mails or used
on web pages. However, printing small images in large print sizes results in the
image turning “grainy.”
Options*
Description
Record pictures with finer detail than those shot at E 3264×2448
or D 2592×1944.
E
3264×2448
D
2592×1944
Good balance between file size and quality; suitable in most
situations.
C
2048×1536
B
1600×1200
A
1280×960
J
1024×768
Record pictures of a size suitable for display on devices such as a
computer monitor.
f
640×480
Record pictures suitable for display on a television with a screen
aspect ratio of 4:3, or for e-mail attachment.
I
3648×2432
Record pictures with the same aspect ratio (3:2) as those shot with
35mm [135] format film cameras.
z
3584×2016
Record pictures with the same aspect ratio (16:9) as wide screen TV.
H
2736×2736
Record square pictures.
Smaller than M 3648×2736, E 3264×2448 and
D 2592×1944; for recording more pictures.
Shooting Features
M
3648×2736
(default setting)
* The total number of pixels captured, and the number of pixels captured horizontally and
vertically.
Example: M 3648×2736 = 10 megapixels, 3648×2736 pixels
C
Image Size Setting
• The setting for the image size is shown by an icon displayed on the monitor during shooting and
playback (A8 to 10).
• The setting is also applied to other shooting modes (except for low noise night mode, and
shooting modes E, F and N).
• In low noise night mode, the available image size is C 2048×1536 or smaller.
• The size of JPEG images can be chosen when you create JPEG images from NRW (RAW) images
using NRW (RAW) processing (E17) (up to a maximum of 3648 × 2736 pixels).
• Image size for the JPEG image can be set when NRW (RAW) + Fine, NRW (RAW) + Normal or
NRW (RAW) + Basic is selected. However, note that I 3648×2432, z 3584×2016 and
H 2736×2736 cannot be selected.
• This feature may not be used in combination with certain features. See “Features That Cannot Be
Used Simultaneously” (A80) for more information.
77
Changing the Image Quality and Image Size
C
Number of Exposures Remaining
The following table lists the approximate number of pictures that can be stored in the internal
memory and on a 4 GB memory card, at each combination of Image size (A77) and Image quality
(A75) settings. Note that the number of exposures that can be stored differs depending on the
composition of the image (due to JPEG compression). In addition, this number may differ depending
on the make of memory card, even if the capacity of the memory card is the same.
Image size
Image quality
Fine
Memory card1
(4 GB)
Print size2
(cm/in.)
770
1,540
3,010
230
31 × 23/12 × 93
NRW (RAW)
19
38
75
5
E 3264×2448
Fine
Normal
Basic
24
48
93
970
1,910
3,650
28 × 21/11 × 8
D 2592×1944
Fine
Normal
Basic
38
74
140
1,520
2,940 22 × 16/8.5 × 6.5
5,480
C 2048×1536
Fine
Normal
Basic
60
116
216
2,410
4,640
8,620
17 × 13/7 × 5
B 1600×1200
Fine
Normal
Basic
96
183
319
3,770
7,100
12,000
14 × 10/5 × 4
A 1280×960
Fine
Normal
Basic
144
263
433
5,740
10,000
17,200
11 × 8/4 × 3
J 1024×768
Fine
Normal
Basic
216
378
606
8,620
15,000
24,100
9 × 7/3.5 × 2.5
f 640×480
Fine
Normal
Basic
433
673
866
17,200
24,100
30,100
5 × 4/2 × 1.5
I 3648×2432
Fine
Normal
Basic
22
43
84
870
1,720
3,350
31 × 21/12 × 8
z 3584×2016
Fine
Normal
Basic
26
53
102
1,060
2,110
4,020
30 × 17/12 × 6.5
H 2736×2736
Fine
Normal
Basic
26
51
99
1,030
2,040
3,890
23 × 23/9 × 9
Normal
M 3648×2736
(default setting) Basic
Shooting Features
78
Internal
memory
(94 MB)
Changing the Image Quality and Image Size
1 If the number of exposures remaining is 10,000 or more, “9999” is displayed.
2 The print size at an output resolution of 300 dpi.
Print sizes are calculated by dividing the number of pixels by the printer resolution (dpi) and
multiplying by 2.54 cm (1 in.). However, even with the same image size setting, images printed at
higher resolutions print smaller than the size indicated, and those printed at lower resolutions print
larger than the size indicated.
3 The print size of NRW (RAW) images differs according to the image size of the NRW (RAW)
processed images (E17).
C
Printing Images of Size 1:1
Change the printer setting to “Border” when printing images with the size set to 1:1.
The images may not be printed in 1:1 ratio depending on the printer.
See the instruction manual of the printer or check with the authorized print dealer for further details.
Shooting Features
79
Features That Cannot Be Used Simultaneously
Some shooting settings cannot be used in combination with other functions.
Restricted function
Setting
When B (infinity) is selected for shooting, the flash is
not available.
Continuous
(A54)
• When BSS or Multi-shot 16 is selected for
shooting, the flash is not available.
• When continuous is selected for shooting, the builtin flash is not available (A84).
• The built-in flash is fixed at X (fill flash) when
Continuous flash is selected for shooting. The
Speedlight (external flash unit) cannot be used
(A84).
Flash mode
Shooting Features
Self-timer/Smile
timer/Remote
control
Focus mode
Image quality
Image size
ISO sensitivity
80
Description
Focus mode
(A67)
Auto bracketing
(A73)
The built-in flash is not available.
Wide-angle
converter (A55)
The flash is not available when On is set for shooting.
Flash control
(A55)
When Flash control is set to Built-in off, V (auto with
red-eye reduction), S (manual), Y (slow sync) and Z
(rear-curtain sync) flash modes cannot be selected.
AF area mode
(A55)
When Subject tracking is selected for shooting, the
self-timer/smile timer/remote control are not available.
Smile timer
(A65)
When shooting with the smile timer, the mode is
changed to A (autofocus).
Continuous
(A54)
B (infinity) cannot be used when Continuous flash is
set for shooting.
AF area mode
(A55)
When Subject tracking is selected for shooting,
E (manual focus) is not available.
Continuous
(A54)
When Multi-shot 16 is selected for shooting, Image
quality is fixed at Normal.
Image quality
(A75)
• Image size is fixed at M 3648×2736 when NRW
(RAW) is selected for Image quality.
• Image size for a JPEG image can be set when NRW
(RAW) + Fine, NRW (RAW) + Normal or NRW
(RAW) + Basic is selected. However, I
3648×2432, z 3584×2016 and H 2736×2736
cannot be selected.
Continuous
(A54)
Image size is fixed at D (2560×1920 pixels) when
Multi-shot 16 is selected for shooting.
Continuous
(A54)
When shooting in Multi-shot 16, ISO sensitivity is
set automatically according to the brightness when
shooting mode A, B or C is used. The setting for ISO
sensitivity is fixed at 400 for shooting mode D.
Features That Cannot Be Used Simultaneously
Restricted function
White balance
Picture Control
Metering
Setting
Description
Picture Control
(A73)
White balance is fixed at Auto (normal) when
Monochrome is selected for shooting.
Wide-angle
converter (A55)
When On is selected for shooting, Preset manual is
not available.
Active D-Lighting When using Active D-Lighting for shooting,
Contrast in manual adjustment cannot be adjusted.
(A55)
AF area mode
(A55)
• When AF area mode is set to Auto, Center (spot),
Center (normal) or Center (wide) while
Metering is set to Spot AF area, the Metering
setting automatically changes to Matrix.
• When AF area mode is set to Subject tracking
while Metering is set to Spot or Spot AF area the
Metering setting automatically changes to Matrix.
Active D-Lighting Metering is reset to Matrix when Active D-Lighting
is set to any mode other than Off.
(A55)
Continuous/
Auto bracketing
Continuous and auto bracketing are not available
simultaneously.
Auto bracketing is reset to OFF when Continuous is
set to any mode other than Single.
The setting for Continuous is reset to Single when
Auto bracketing is set to any mode other than OFF.
Self-timer (A64)/ • Continuous and the self-timer/remote control are
Smile timer
not available simultaneously.
• Continuous or auto bracketing and smile timer are
(A65)/Remote
not available simultaneously.
control (A60)
Image quality
(A75)
BSS, Multi-shot 16 or White balance bracketing
cannot be used when Image quality is set to NRW
(RAW), NRW (RAW) + Fine, NRW (RAW) + Normal or
NRW (RAW) + Basic.
Picture Control
(A73)
White balance bracketing cannot be used when
Monochrome is selected for shooting.
Long exposure
NR (A55)
When On is selected for Long exposure NR, Multishot 16 is not available.
Wide-angle
converter (A55)
Continuous flash cannot be used when On is set for
shooting.
Shooting Features
Continuous
(A54)/Auto
bracketing
(A73)
81
Features That Cannot Be Used Simultaneously
Restricted function
Setting
Focus mode
(A67)
Picture Control
(A73)
When Picture Control is set to Monochrome while
AF area mode is set to Subject tracking, the AF area
mode setting automatically changes to Auto.
Long exposure NR
Continuous
(A54)
When Multi-shot 16 is selected for shooting, the Long
exposure NR is not available.
Active D-Lighting
ISO sensitivity
(A73)
When ISO sensitivity is set to High ISO sensitivity
auto, 3200 or Hi 1, Active D-Lighting is not
available. When High ISO sensitivity auto, 3200 or
Hi 1 is selected, Active D-Lighting is reset to Off.
Image quality
(A75)
Print date is not available when Image quality is set to
NRW (RAW), NRW (RAW) + Fine, NRW (RAW) +
Normal or NRW (RAW) + Basic.
Continuous
(A54)
When Continuous, Continuous flash or BSS is
selected for shooting, print date is not available.
Auto bracketing
(A73)
Print date is not available.
Smile timer
(A65)
The virtual horizon is not displayed when shooting
with the smile timer.
AF area mode
(A55)
• The virtual horizon is not displayed when shooting
with Face priority.
• The virtual horizon is not displayed when shooting
with Subject tracking. After the subject has been
registered (during subject tracking), the histogram
and framing grid are not displayed.
Smile timer
(A65)
Motion detection is disabled when shooting with the
smile timer.
AF area mode
(A55)
Motion detection is disabled when shooting with
Subject tracking.
Continuous
(A54)
Shutter sound is disabled when Continuous,
Continuous flash, BSS, or Multi-shot 16 is selected
in the shooting menu.
Auto bracketing
(A73)
Shutter sound is disabled.
AF area mode
Shooting Features
Print date
Photo info
Motion detection
Sound settings
Blink warning
82
Description
• When a setting other than Subject tracking is
selected and B (infinity) is selected as the focus
mode for shooting, the camera focuses at infinity
regardless of the applied AF area mode option.
• When set to E (manual focus), the AF area mode
cannot be set.
Blink warning does not take effect when using the
Smile timer
smile timer, Continuous is set to a setting other than
(A65)/
Single, or auto bracketing is set.
Continuous
(A54)/Auto
bracketing (A73)
Features That Cannot Be Used Simultaneously
Restricted function
Digital zoom
Setting
Description
Smile timer
(A65)
The digital zoom cannot be used when shooting with
the smile timer.
Focus mode
(A67)
The digital zoom cannot be used when E (manual
focus) is selected.
Image quality
(A75)
The digital zoom cannot be used when Image quality
is set to NRW (RAW), NRW (RAW) + Fine, NRW
(RAW) + Normal or NRW (RAW) + Basic.
Continuous
(A54)
The digital zoom cannot be used when Multi-shot 16
is selected for shooting.
AF area mode
(A55)
The digital zoom cannot be used when shooting with
Subject tracking.
Wide-angle
converter (A55)
The digital zoom cannot be used when On is selected
for shooting.
The Control Range of the Shutter Speed (A, B, C, D Modes)
Setting
Auto2,
ISO 100-2002,
ISO 100-4002,
ISO 100, 200, 400,
High ISO sensitivity auto2
ISO sensitivity (A73)1
ISO 800
ISO 1600
ISO 3200
Hi 1
Continuous (A54)
1
2
3
Continuous, BSS,
Continuous flash
Multi-shot 16
Control range
1/2000 to 8 s (A, B mode)
1/40003 to 8 s (C mode)
1/40003 to 60 s (D mode)
Shooting Features
The control range of the shutter speed differs depending on the ISO sensitivity setting.
Additionally, the control range changes in the following continuous shooting settings.
1/2000 to 2 s (A mode)
1/2000 to 4 s (B mode)
1/40003 to 4 s (C mode)
1/40003 to 60 s (D mode)
1/2000 to 8 s (A, B mode)
1/40003 to 8 s (C mode)
1/40003 to 15 s (D mode)
1/2000 to 4 s (A, B mode)
1/40003 to 4 s (C, D mode)
1/2000 to 1/2 s (A, B mode)
1/40003 to 1/2 s (C, D mode)
1/2000 to 1/8 s (A, B mode)
1/40003 to 1/8 s (C, D mode)
1/2000 to 1/2 s (A, B mode)
1/40003 to 1/2 s (C, D mode)
1/2000 to 1/30 s
The ISO sensitivity setting is restricted depending on the continuous shooting setting (A80).
In D mode, the ISO sensitivity is fixed at ISO 100.
A shutter speed of 1/4000 second is available only when the zoom is at the wide-angle
position and the aperture value is set to f/8 (minimum aperture).
83
Features That Cannot Be Used Simultaneously
Operation of Flash during Continuous Mode
The operation of the built-in flash and the Speedlight flash units (available separately from
Nikon) are restricted as shown below, depending on the continuous setting that is applied.
Continuous mode
Single
Continuous
Continuous flash
BSS
Multi-shot 16
Intvl timer shooting
Auto bracketing
Flash units*
Available
Available
Not available
Not available
Not available
Available
Available
Shooting Features
When a flash unit (available separately) is mounted on the camera’s accessory shoe, the builtin flash is automatically set to W (off ).
* When shooting using continuous or auto bracketing with the flash mode set to V (auto
with red-eye reduction) (A61, 62), only the pre-flash element of red-eye reduction is
performed.
B
84
Built-in flash
Available
Off
Available
Off
Off
Available
Off
Notes on Digital Zoom
• The digital zoom cannot be used with certain shooting modes.
• When the digital zoom is in effect, selectable options for AF area mode or metering mode is
restricted (E79).
Using Face Detection
In the following shooting modes, the camera uses face
detection to automatically focus on human faces. If the
camera detects more than one face, a double border is
displayed around the face that the camera will focus
on, and single borders are displayed around the other
faces.
Shooting mode
Face priority is selected for AF
area mode (E48)
Scene auto selector, Portrait,
Night portrait scene mode
(A39)
F5.6
1342
Number of faces that
can be detected
Focus area (double border)
Up to 12
The face closest to the camera
Up to 3
The face closest to the center of
the frame
• When using Face priority, if you press the shutter-release button halfway while no faces are
detected or while framing a shot with no faces in it, the camera automatically selects one or more
of the nine focus areas containing the subject closest to the camera.
• When Scene auto selector is selected, the focus area changes depending on which scene the
camera selects.
• If no faces are detected when the shutter-release button is pressed halfway in Portrait or Night
portrait scene mode, the camera will focus on the subject at the center of the frame.
• When a (smile timer) is selected, the shutter releases automatically when the camera detects a
smiling face.
B
Shooting Features
a (Smile timer) (A65)
1/250
Notes on Face Detection
• The camera’s ability to detect faces depends on a variety of factors, including whether or not the
subject is facing the camera. Additionally, the camera may be unable to detect faces in the
following situations:
- When faces are partially hidden by sunglasses or otherwise obstructed
- When faces take up too much or too little of the frame
• When the frame includes more than one face, the faces detected by the camera and the face on
which the camera focuses depend upon a variety of factors, including the direction in which the
subject is facing.
• In some rare cases, such as those described in “Autofocus” (A33), the subject may not be in focus
even though the double border turns green. If the camera does not focus, try “Focus Lock”
(A33).
C
Viewing Pictures Taken Using Face Detection
• During playback, the camera automatically rotates images according to the orientation of the
faces that were detected at the time of shooting. Pictures taken when using Continuous (A54)
or Auto bracketing (A73) are not rotated.
• When zooming in on an image displayed in full-frame playback mode by rotating the zoom
control toward g (i), the image is enlarged at the center of the face that was detected during
shooting (A35). Pictures taken when using Continuous (A54) or Auto bracketing (A73) are
not displayed in this way.
85
Using Skin Softening
In the following shooting modes, the camera detects up to three human faces
when the shutter is released, and processes the image to make facial skin tones
softer before saving the image.
• Scene auto selector (A40), Portrait (A40) or Night portrait (A41) in
scene mode
Skin softening can also be applied to saved images (A89).
Shooting Features
B
86
Notes on Skin Softening
• It may take more time to save images.
• Under some shooting conditions, the desired skin softening results may not be achieved, and skin
softening may be applied to areas of the image where there are no faces.
Playback Features
This chapter describes how to select certain types of images for playback as well as
some of the features available when playing back images.
List by date
15/11/2011 15:30
0004.JPG
4 132
26/11/2011
4
20/11/2011
11
18/11/2011
8
15/11/2011
4
15/11/2011 15:30
0004.JPG
4 132
Quick retouch
D-Lighting
Skin softening
Filter effects
Print order
Slide show
Delete
Playback Features
Playback menu
87
Playback Features
Selecting Pictures for Playback by Date (List by Date Mode)
In list by date mode, pictures taken on the same date can be played back.
Press the C (list by date) button during
playback to display the list by date screen.
• Press the C (list by date) button again to
return to the normal playback mode.
Playback Features
Use the multi selector to select a date and
List by date
then press the k button to play back images captured
4
26/11/2011
on the selected date.
11
20/11/2011
• The first picture taken on the selected date is
8
18/11/2011
displayed.
4
15/11/2011
• To select a different date, rotate the zoom control
toward f (h).
• The following operations can be performed while the list by date screen is
displayed.
- l (delete) button: Delete all images captured on the selected date.
- d button: If you select the C tab (list by date menu) from the shooting
date selection screen, you can select one of the following features in the
playback menu (A89) and apply that feature to images captured on the
selected date.
➝ Print order, slide show, delete, protect, hide image
• When viewing images in full-frame playback mode, if you press the d button
to display the menu and then select the C tab (list by date menu), you can then
select a feature from the playback menu (A89).
• Thumbnail display and calendar display (A35) cannot be used in list by date
mode.
B
88
Notes on List by Date Mode
• Up to 29 dates can be selected. If images exist for more than 29 dates, all images saved earlier than
most recent 29 dates will be combined under Others.
• The 9,000 most recent images can be displayed in list by date mode.
• Pictures taken when the camera’s date is not set are treated as images captured on January 1,
2011.
Features Available in Playback Mode (Playback Menu)
When viewing images in full-frame playback mode or
thumbnail playback mode, you can configure the
following functions by pressing the d button to
display the menu, and then selecting the c tab or C
tab (A13).
Option
Playback menu
Quick retouch
D-Lighting
Skin softening
Filter effects
Print order
Slide show
Delete
Description
A
E11
I D-Lighting1
Create copies with enhanced brightness and contrast,
brightening dark portions of an image.
E11
e Skin softening1
When this feature is enabled, the camera detects faces in
pictures taken and creates a copy with softer facial skin
tones.
E12
p Filter effects1
Apply a variety of effects using digital filter. The available
effects are Soft, Selective color, Cross screen, Fisheye,
Miniature effect and Painting.
E13
2
When using a printer to print images saved on the memory
card, the print order function can be used to select which
images are printed, and how many copies of each image
are printed.
E60
b Slide show2
Images saved in the internal memory or on a memory card
are played back in an automatic slide show.
E63
c Delete2
Delete an image. Multiple images can be deleted.
E64
d Protect2
Protect selected images from accidental deletion.
E66
f Rotate image
Specify the orientation in which saved images are displayed
E66
in playback mode.
i Hide image2
Hide the selected images so that they cannot be played back
E66
on the camera monitor.
g Small picture1
Create a small copy of the picture taken. This feature is
useful for creating copies for display on Web pages or email attachments.
a Print order
Playback Features
k Quick retouch1
Create retouched copies in which contrast and saturation
have been enhanced.
E14
89
Features Available in Playback Mode (Playback Menu)
Option
1
2
Playback Features
90
3
Description
A
E Voice memo
Use the camera’s microphone to record voice memos and
attach them to the picture taken. Playback and deletion of
voice memos can also be performed.
E67
h Copy3
Copy images between the internal memory and a memory
card.
E68
j Black border1
Create a new picture surrounded by a black border.
E15
R Straighten1
Compensate for the slanting of pictures taken.
E16
F NRW (RAW)
processing1
Create JPEG-format copies by performing RAW processing
within the camera for NRW (RAW) images (A75) without
having to use a computer.
E17
This function is applied to edit the image currently selected and store it as separate file
from the original file. Pictures shot with the Image size (A77) of I 3648×2432,
z 3584×2016, or H 2736×2736 and pictures extracted from movies recorded with n
HD 720p (1280×720) can only be modified using the black border editing function (E9,
E10). Edited images may not be retouched again in some cases (E10). Movies cannot
be edited.
When using list by date mode, press the d button from the list by date screen (A88) to
apply the same function to all images captured on the selected date.
This function is not displayed when using list by date mode.
See “Editing Still Images” (E9) and “The Playback Menu” (E60) in the Reference
Section for more information about each function.
Connecting the Camera to a TV, Computer, or Printer
You can enhance your enjoyment of images and movies by connecting the
camera to a TV, computer, or printer.
• Before connecting the camera to an external device, make sure the remaining
battery level is sufficient and turn the camera off. For information about the
connection methods and subsequent operations, refer to the documentation
included with the device in addition to this document.
HDMI mini connector (Type C)
USB/audio/video output connector
How to open the
terminal cover
Insert the plug straight.
Viewing images on a TV
E20
Viewing and organizing images on a computer
A92
If you transfer images to a computer, you can perform simple
retouching and manage image data in addition to playing back images
and movies.
Connection method: Connect the camera to the computer’s USB input
jack with the included USB Cable UC-E6.
• Before connecting to a computer, install ViewNX 2 on the computer
using the included ViewNX 2 CD. See A94 for more information
about using the ViewNX 2 CD and transferring images to a computer.
Printing images without using a computer
Playback Features
You can view the camera’s images and movies on a TV.
Connection method: Connect the video and audio plugs of the included
Audio Video Cable EG-CP16 to the TV’s input jacks. Alternatively,
connect a commercially available HDMI cable (Type C) to the TV’s HDMI
input jack.
E22
If you connect the camera to a PictBridge-compatible printer, you can
print images without using a computer.
Connection method: Connect the camera directly to the printer’s USB
input jack with the included USB Cable UC-E6.
91
Using ViewNX 2
ViewNX 2 is an all-in-one software package which enables you to transfer, view,
edit and share images.
Install ViewNX 2 using the ViewNX 2 CD.
Your Imaging Toolbox
ViewNX 2™
Installing ViewNX 2
Playback Features
Compatible Operating Systems
Windows
• Windows 7 Home Basic/Home Premium/Professional/Enterprise/Ultimate
• Windows Vista Home Basic/Home Premium/Business/Enterprise/Ultimate
(Service Pack 2)
• Windows XP Home Edition/Professional (Service Pack 3)
Macintosh
• Mac OS X (version 10.5.8, 10.6.7)
Refer to the Nikon website for the latest information on operating system
compatibility.
1
Start the computer and insert the ViewNX 2 CD into the CD-ROM drive.
• Mac OS: When the ViewNX 2 window is displayed, double-click the Welcome icon.
92
Using ViewNX 2
2
Select a language in the language selection dialog to open the
installation window.
• If the desired language is not available, click Region Selection to choose a different
region and then choose the desired language (the Region Selection button is not
available in the European release).
• Click Next to display the installation window.
3
Start the installer.
4
Exit the installer when the installation completion screen is displayed.
• Windows: Click Yes.
• Mac OS: Click OK.
Playback Features
• We recommend clicking Installation Guide in the installation window to check the
installation help information and system requirements before installing ViewNX 2.
• Click Typical Installation (Recommended) in the installation window.
• Follow the on-screen instructions to install the software.
The following software is installed:
• ViewNX 2 (consisting of the three modules below)
- Nikon Transfer 2: For transferring images to the computer
- ViewNX 2: For viewing, editing, and printing transferred images
- Nikon Movie Editor: For basic editing of transferred movies
• Panorama Maker 5 (for creating a single panorama photo using a series of images shot
in panorama assist scene mode)
• QuickTime (Windows only)
5
Remove the ViewNX 2 CD from the CD-ROM Drive.
93
Using ViewNX 2
Transferring Images to the Computer
1
Choose how images will be copied to the computer.
Choose one of the following methods:
• Direct USB connection: Turn the camera off and ensure that the memory card is
inserted in the camera. Connect the camera to the computer using the included USB
Cable UC-E6 and then turn the camera on.
Playback Features
• SD card slot: If your computer is equipped with an SD card slot, the card can be
inserted directly in the slot.
• SD card reader: Connect a card reader (available separately from third-party
suppliers) to the computer and insert the memory card.
If a message is displayed prompting you to choose a program, select Nikon Transfer 2.
• When using Windows 7
If the dialog shown at right is displayed,
follow the steps below to select Nikon
Transfer 2.
1 Select Nikon Transfer 2 for Import
pictures and videos. Under Import
pictures and videos, click Change
program. A program selection dialog will be displayed; select Import File using
Nikon Transfer 2 and click OK.
2 Double-click Import File.
If the memory card contains a large number of images, it may take a while for Nikon
Transfer 2 to start. Wait until Nikon Transfer 2 starts.
B
94
Connecting the USB Cable
The connection may not be recognized if the camera is connected to the computer via a USB hub.
Using ViewNX 2
2
Transfer images to the computer.
• Confirm that the name of the connected camera or removable disk is displayed in the
“Source” panel in the Nikon Transfer 2 “Options” area (1).
• Click Start Transfer (2).
1
2
• At default settings, all the images on the memory card will be copied to the
computer.
3
Terminate the connection.
Viewing Images
Playback Features
• If the camera is connected to the computer, turn the camera off and then disconnect
the USB cable.
• If you are using a card reader or card slot, choose the appropriate option in the
computer operating system to eject the removable disk corresponding to the
memory card and then remove the card from the card reader or card slot.
Start ViewNX 2.
• Images are displayed in ViewNX 2 when
transfer is complete.
• Consult online help for more information on
using ViewNX 2.
C
Starting ViewNX 2 Manually
• Windows: Double-click the ViewNX 2 shortcut on the desktop.
• Mac OS: Click the ViewNX 2 icon in the Dock.
95
Using ViewNX 2
Retouching Photographs
Click Edit in the ViewNX 2 toolbar.
Image editing functions include tone compensation, sharpness adjustment, and
trimming (cropping).
Editing Movies
Click Movie Editor in the ViewNX 2 toolbar.
Movie editing functions include the ability to delete unwanted scenes.
Playback Features
Printing Images
Click Print in the ViewNX 2 toolbar.
A dialog is displayed and images can be printed using a printer connected to the
computer.
96
Recording and Playing Back
Movies
Set the mode dial to D to display the movie recording screen. Press the shutterrelease button to record movies.
10m32s
In playback mode, press the k button to play back a movie.
10m16s
7m42s
7m42
Recording and Playing Back Movies
15/11/2011 15:30
0004.MOV
97
Recording and Playing Back Movies
Recording Movies
Movies can be recorded with sound.
1
2
Recording and Playing Back Movies
98
Rotate the mode dial to D.
Movie options
• The amount of available recording time is
displayed on the monitor.
• When Movie options is set to n HD
720p (1280×720), monitor display
changes to an aspect ratio of 16:9 (the
area indicated on the right is recorded).
10m32s
• The approximate remaining recording
time is displayed on the monitor. C is
Available movie recording time*
displayed while saving to the internal
memory.
* The maximum recording time shown in the illustration differs from the actual value.
Press the shutter-release button all
the way to start recording.
• The camera focuses at the center of the
frame. The focus area is not displayed
when the movie is recorded.
• When the g (AE-L/AF-L) button is pressed
7m23s
while recording movies, the exposure and
focus are locked (A3). Press the g (AE-L/
AF-L) button again to cancel the exposure and focus lock.
• Recording stops automatically when the maximum movie length has been recorded.
3
Press the shutter-release button all the way to end recording.
B
Note on Recording Movies
When the AF/access lamp blinks after recording movies, the movie is not fully recorded yet. Do not
open the battery-chamber/memory card slot cover. Removing the memory card or the battery
while a movie is being saved may result in loss of the movie data or damage to the camera or to the
memory card.
Recording Movies
B
Notes on Movie Recording
• When recording a movie onto a memory card, a memory card with an SD speed class of Class 6 or
higher is recommended (A23). If the transfer speed of the card is slow, the movie recording may
end unexpectedly.
• Using a digital zoom causes image quality to deteriorate. If you start recording the movie without
using digital zoom, and you rotate the zoom control toward g, the zoom stops at the maximum
optical zoom ratio. Release the zoom control once, then rotate it again toward g to trigger digital
zoom. When recording ends, digital zoom turns off.
• The sound of using the zoom control, zoom, autofocus, vibration reduction or aperture control
when the brightness changes may be recorded. To minimize the recording of the zoom sound, set
Zoom speed in the setup menu to Auto (default setting) or Quiet (A104).
• Smear (F3) visible in the monitor when recording movies will be recorded with the movies.
Avoiding bright objects such as the sun, reflections of the sun, and electric lights when recording
movies is recommended.
• The flash does not fire.
B
Notes on Autofocus
• When Autofocus mode in the movie menu (A101) is set to A Single AF (default setting),
the focus is locked when the shutter-release button is pressed halfway.
• Autofocus may not perform as expected (A33). Should this occur, try the following:
1. Before recording, set Autofocus mode in the movie menu to A Single AF (default setting).
2. Position a different subject at the same distance in the middle of the screen. Press the shutterrelease button to start the movie recording, and change the composition.
B
Notes on the Camera Temperature
Recording and Playing Back Movies
• The camera may become warm when recording movies for an extended period of time or when
the camera is used in a hot area.
• When the temperature inside the camera becomes extremely
high while recording a movie, recording automatically stop after
30 seconds.
The remaining amount of recording time (B30s) is displayed on
the monitor.
The camera turns off in 5 seconds after movie recording
automatically stops.
7m23s
Leave the camera off until the inside of the camera has cooled
and then use it.
99
Recording Movies
C
Maximum Movie Length
Movie options (A73)
Internal memory
(94 MB)
Memory card
(4 GB)*
n HD 720p (1280×720)
1 min 28 s
55 min
m VGA (640×480)
4 min 24 s
2 h 55 min
20 min 28 s
13 h 35 min
W QVGA (320×240)
All figures are approximate. The maximum movie length varies with the make of the memory card
and the bitrate of the recorded movie.
* The maximum recording time for a single movie is 29 minutes. The maximum movie length
displayed during recording is 29 minutes, even when there is enough free space on the memory
card for a longer movie.
C
External Microphones
• Instead of the built-in microphone, a Stereo Microphone ME-1 (available separately; E103) can
be connected to the external microphone connector (A3) to record sound during movie
recording or voice memos for still pictures (A90).
• When the external microphone is connected, Wind noise reduction in the movie menu (A101)
cannot be used.
• The external microphones sensitivity can be set in External mic sensitivity in the setup menu
(A104).
C
Recording and Playing Back Movies
100
More Information
See “File and Folder Names” (E99) for more information.
Recording Movies
Changing Movie Mode Settings
Use the following operation controls to change the setting.
• See “Features That Can Be Set Using the Multi Selector” (A60) for more
information on remote control (A60), focus mode (A67).
• See “Features Set Using the Exposure Compensation Dial” for more information
on exposure compensation (A71).
• See “Features That Can Be Set with the Quick Menu” for more information on
available quick menu (A73).
• See “Options Available in the Movie Menu” (below) for more information on
functions that can be set using the d button.
Options Available in the Movie Menu
In the movie mode, the following option settings can
be changed.
Movie
Autofocus mode
Wind noise reduction
Display the shooting screen in the movie mode M d button M D tab (A13)
Description
A
Autofocus mode
Single AF (default setting) where the camera focuses on the
same position as one at the start of movie recording, or Fulltime AF where the camera focuses continuously during
movie recording can be selected.
E69
When Full-time AF is selected, the sound of the camera
focusing may be heard in recorded movies. If you want to
prevent the sound of the camera focusing from being
recorded, select Single AF.
Wind noise
reduction
Set whether or not to reduce wind noise during movie
recording. During playback, not only wind noise, but other
E69
sounds may also become difficult to hear. The default setting
is Off.
Recording and Playing Back Movies
Option
101
Playing Back Movies
1
Press the c (playback) button to select playback
mode.
15/11/2011 15:30
0004.MOV
• Press the multi selector to select a movie.
• Movies can be recognized by the movie options icon
(A100).
10m16s
2
Press the k button to play back a movie.
Pausing
Adjusting the volume
Press the zoom control g/f (A2) during playback.
Operations available during movie playback
Playback controls appear at the top of the monitor.
Press the multi selector J or K to select an icon of
playback control, then press the k button to perform
the following operations.
7m42s
During
playback
Volume
indicator
Recording and Playing Back Movies
To
Use
Rewind
A
Rewind the movie while the k button is pressed down.
Advance
B
Advance the movie while the k button is pressed down.
Pause
E
End
G
Description
The following operations can be performed with the playback
controls at the top of the monitor while playback is paused.
C Rewind the movie by one frame. Hold down the k
button to rewind continuously.*
D Advance the movie by one frame. Hold down the k
button to advance continuously.*
Extract and save only the required parts of the movie
I
(E28).
Save the extracted frame from a movie as a still picture
H
(E29).
F
Resume playback.
Return to full-frame playback mode.
* The movie can also be advanced or rewound by one frame by rotating the multi selector or
command dial.
To delete a movie, use full-frame playback mode (A34) or thumbnail playback
mode (A35) to select a movie and press the l button (A36).
B
102
Note on Movie Playback
Movies recorded with cameras other than COOLPIX P7100 cannot be played back.
General Camera Setup
This chapter describes the various settings that can be adjusted in the z setup
menu.
Set up
F5.6
1342
• See “Using Menus (the d Button)” (A13) for more information about using
the camera’s menus.
• For further details about each setting, refer to “The Setup Menu” in the
Reference Section (E70).
General Camera Setup
1/250
Welcome screen
Time zone and date
Monitor settings
Print date
Self-timer: after release
Vibration reduction
Motion detection
103
General Camera Setup
The Setup Menu
Press the d button M z (setup) tab (A13)
From the menu screen, select the z tab to display the
setup menu, and then you can change the following
settings.
Option
General Camera Setup
104
Set up
Welcome screen
Time zone and date
Monitor settings
Print date
Self-timer: after release
Vibration reduction
Motion detection
Description
A
Welcome screen
Select the image displayed as the welcome screen
when the camera is turned on. Select COOLPIX to
display the COOLPIX logo. Select Select an image to
use a picture taken with the camera as the welcome
screen. The default setting is None.
E70
Time zone and date
Set settings related to the camera’s date and time. The
Time zone setting allows you to specify the time zone
where the camera is mainly used and whether or not
daylight saving time is in effect. When the x travel
destination is set, the camera automatically calculates
the time difference between the travel destination and
the w home time zone, and saves images using the
date and time of the travel destination.
E71
Monitor settings
Set the image display after shooting and the screen
brightness. When using Photo info, set whether or not
to display virtual horizon, histograms, and framing grid
on the monitor. When using Virtual horizon display,
set the virtual horizon indicator to either Circle (default
setting) or Bars.
E74
Print date
Imprint the shooting date and time on pictures at the
time of shooting. The default setting is Off.
• Dates cannot be imprinted when the scene mode is
set to Sports, Museum, Backlighting with HDR set
to On, Panorama assist, or Pet portrait with
Continuous or during movie recording.
E75
Self-timer: after
release
Set whether or not to cancel the setting after shooting
pictures with the self-timer. The default setting is Exit
self-timer mode.
E76
The Setup Menu
Option
Description
A
E76
Motion detection
When the camera detects camera shake or subject
movement at the time of shooting, it automatically
increases ISO sensitivity and shutter speed to reduce
blurring. The default setting is Off.
The r indicator lights in green when the camera
detects camera shake and increases shutter speed.
• When using certain shooting modes or settings,
motion is not detected. In this case the r indicator is
not displayed.
E77
AF assist
When set to Auto (default setting), the AF-assist
illuminator (A33) lights when shooting in dark
surroundings to help the camera focus.
• The illuminator has a range of about 8.0 m (26 ft) at
the maximum wide-angle position and about 7.0 m
(22 ft) at the maximum telephoto position.
• Even if Auto is selected, the AF-assist illuminator may
not light depending on the position of the focus area
or the scene mode that is selected.
E78
Red-eye reduction
When the flash mode (A61) is set to V (auto with
red-eye reduction) and this feature is set to Pre-flash
on (default setting), the flash repeatedly fires preflashes at low intensity before the main flash to reduce
the red-eye effect, and it then performs the red-eye
reduction process using picture compensation.
E78
Digital zoom
When set to On (default setting), when the optical
zoom is at the maximum telephoto zoom position,
rotating and holding the zoom control toward g (i)
triggers the digital zoom (A31).
When set to Crop, the digital zoom is limited to the
range (to the zoom position V) at which image quality
of the shot still picture does not deteriorate (except
when recording a movie).
• The digital zoom cannot be used simultaneously in
certain settings such as the shooting mode.
E79
General Camera Setup
Vibration reduction
Reduce blurring caused by camera shake when
shooting. The default setting is On.
• When using a tripod to stabilize the camera, set this
feature to Off to prevent this feature from
malfunctioning.
105
The Setup Menu
Description
A
Zoom speed
Set the zoom operation speed.
When set to Auto (default setting), the zoom is
operated at Normal speed during still picture shooting.
The zoom is operated at Quiet speed during movie
recording.
When set to Normal, the zoom is operated at normal
speed during both still picture shooting and movie
recording.
When set to Quiet, the zoom is operated at a slower
speed than Normal to minimize recording of the zoom
operating noise during both still picture shooting and
movie recording.
E80
Fixed aperture
When set to On in C or D shooting mode, the zoom is
operated with minimum changes in the aperture value.
Note, however, that the range of aperture values may
be exceeded in some zoom operations. The default
setting is Off.
E80
Sound settings
Turn various camera sounds on and off. In the default
setting, beep sounds are on.
• The operation sound is disabled in certain settings
such as shooting mode.
E81
Record orientation
When set to Auto (default setting), the orientation data
is recorded with the picture taken.
• Pictures taken using face detection (A85) or pet
detection (A45) will be rotated automatically in
accordance with the orientation of the face when
they are displayed, regardless of the settings.
E81
Rotate tall
When set to On (default setting), the images are
rotated automatically in accordance with camera
orientation when they are played back.
E82
Auto off
Set the amount of time that passes before the monitor
is turned off to save power. The default setting is 1 min.
E82
Format memory/
Format card
Format the internal memory (only when a memory card
is not inserted) or the memory card (when a memory
card is inserted).
• All data stored in the internal memory or on the
memory card is deleted during formatting and
cannot be restored. Be sure to transfer important
images to a computer and save them before
formatting.
E83
Language
Change the camera’s display language.
E83
Option
General Camera Setup
106
The Setup Menu
A
TV settings
E84
External mic
sensitivity
Set the sensitivity of the external microphone. The
default setting is Auto.
• When the sensitivity of the microphone is low, set
the option to High.
E84
Built-in ND filter
When the camera’s built-in ND filter is used, the amount
of light that enters the camera can be reduced while
shooting. Use this feature in situations such as when
overexposure results from the subject being too bright.
The default setting is Off.
• In shooting modes other than A, B, C, D, E, F,
N and O (low noise night) modes, the built-in ND
filter is controlled automatically according to the
shooting mode and shooting conditions, regardless
of the setting.
E85
Customize command
dials
Switch the functions that can be operated using the
main command dial and sub-command dial for
shooting pictures.
• The default setting is No swap.
E86
Multi selector right
press
When set to AF area mode (default setting), when the
multi selector K (G) is pressed during shooting, the AF
area mode setting (A50) is displayed.
In order not to display the AF area mode setting even
if K (G) is pressed, set to Off.
E86
When set to Press twice to delete, the image can be
deleted by pressing the l button again while the
Delete button options
delete confirmation message is displayed.
The default setting is Disable second press.
General Camera Setup
Description
Select this option if no image is displayed on a TV even
when the audio/video cable or HDMI cable is
connected to the TV. HDMI device control is used for
setting whether or not the camera receives signals from
a TV when the TV that conforms to the HDMI-CEC
standard is connected with an HDMI cable.
Option
E86
AE/AF lock button
Select the function to be performed when the g (AEL/AF-L) button is pressed during shooting. When set to
AE/AF lock button (default setting), both focus and
exposure are locked if the g (AE-L/AF-L) button is
pressed while shooting.
• Not available when the scene mode is Scene auto
selector (A40).
E87
Fn1 + shutter button
Set the function to be performed when the shutterrelease button is pressed while pressing the w1
(FUNC1) button during shooting. The default setting is
Off.
E88
107
The Setup Menu
Description
A
Fn1 + command dial
Set the function to be performed when the command
dial is rotated while pressing the w1 (FUNC1) button
during shooting. The default setting is Off.
E89
Fn1 guide display
Set whether or not to display a guide when the w1
(FUNC1) button is pressed during shooting. The default
setting is On.
E89
Fn2 button
Set the operation to be performed when the w2
(FUNC2) button is pressed during shooting. The default
setting is Off.
E90
Customize My Menu
Register frequently used menu items in My Menu
(A73) (maximum of five).
E90
Reset file numbering
When Yes is selected, the sequential numbering of file
numbers is reset. After resetting, a new folder is created
and the file number for the next image taken starts
from “0001.”
E91
Blink warning
When the camera detects that a human subject may
have closed the eyes immediately after recognizing the
face while shooting with modes other than the smile
timer (A85), the Did someone blink? screen is
displayed on the monitor to check the picture taken.
The default setting is Off.
E92
Eye-Fi upload
Set whether or not to enable the function for sending
images to a computer using a commercially available
Eye-Fi card. The default setting is Disable.
E93
MF distance indicator
units
Set the unit of distance for displaying at screen gauge,
to either m (meter) (default setting) or ft (feet) when
using manual focus.
E94
Reverse indicators
Set the exposure indicator to be displayed when
shooting mode is D and +/– display direction of
indicator for setting the bracketing.
E94
Reset all
Reset the camera’s settings to their default values.
• Some of the settings such as Time zone and date
and Language and user settings that were saved for
mode dial E, F and N are not reset.
E94
Firmware version
Display the current camera firmware version.
E98
Option
General Camera Setup
108
E
Reference Section
The Reference Section provides detailed information and hints for using the
camera.
Shooting
Taking Pictures with Manual Focus ..................................................................... E2
Using Panorama Assist ............................................................................................. E3
A, B, C, D Modes ..................................................................................................... E5
Playback
Editing Still Images .................................................................................................... E9
Connecting the Camera to a TV (Viewing Images on a TV).......................E20
Connecting the Camera to a Printer (Direct Print) .......................................E22
Editing Movies ...........................................................................................................E28
Quick Menu ................................................................................................................E30
Shooting Menu (A, B, C or D Mode) ..............................................................E43
Specialized Menu for E, F or N.................................................................E58
The Playback Menu..................................................................................................E60
The Movie Menu .......................................................................................................E69
The Setup Menu........................................................................................................E70
Additional Information
File and Folder Names ............................................................................................E99
Speedlights (External Flash Unit)..................................................................... E101
Optional Accessories............................................................................................ E103
Error Messages ....................................................................................................... E107
E1
Reference Section
Menu
Reference Section
Taking Pictures with Manual Focus
Available when the shooting mode is A, B, C, D, E, F, N, O (low noise
night), u (special effects) or the Sports scene mode.
1
Press the multi selector I (p
focus mode).
• Use the multi selector to choose E
(manual focus) and press the k button.
• W is displayed on the top of the monitor,
and the image area and the enlarged
center of the picture are displayed at the
same time.
2
MF
Adjust the focus.
Reference Section
• Use the multi selector to adjust the focus while viewing
the image on the monitor.
• Press H to focus on far subjects.
• Press I to focus on near subjects.
1/250 F5.6
• When K is pressed, first the camera is focused with
autofocus, and then the manual focus can be operated.
Choose Yes and press the k button to focus on the subject in the center of the
screen with autofocus.
• Press the shutter-release button halfway to check the composition. Press the shutterrelease button all the way to take the picture.
3
Press the k button.
• The set focus is locked. You can continue shooting with
the locked focus.
• To readjust the focus, press the k button again to
display the screen in step 2.
• To change back to autofocus, return to step 1 and
choose any setting other than E.
C
1/250
F5.6
1342
E (Manual Focus)
• The digits displayed for the gauge on the right of the monitor in step 2 serve as a guideline for the
distance to a subject that is in focus when the gauge indicates the center. To change the unit of
this gauge, use MF distance indicator units (E94) in the setup menu.
• Press the shutter-release button halfway to preview an approximate depth of field (the area in
focus behind and in front of the subject).
• The digital zoom is not available.
• Focus mode changes to A (autofocus) when the monitor is turned off.
• When Fn1 + command dial (E89) in the setup menu is set to Manual focus, the screen shown
in step 2 can be displayed or the focus can be adjusted by rotating the command dial while
pressing the w1 button.
E2
Using Panorama Assist
Using a tripod makes the composition easier. When using a tripod to stabilize the
camera, set Vibration reduction (E76) to Off in the setup menu.
1
Rotate the mode dial to y.
2
Press the d button to display the
scene menu screen, choose
p Panorama assist with the multi
selector and press the k button.
• The I icon is displayed to show the
direction in which pictures are joined.
3
Scene menu
Fireworks show
Black and white copy
Backlighting
Panorama assist
Pet portrait
Use the multi selector to choose the direction
and press the k button.
4
Frame the first portion of the
panorama scene and take the first
picture.
• The camera focuses on the subject at the
center of the frame.
• 1/3 of the image will be displayed as
translucent.
1/250
F5.6
1342
E3
Reference Section
• Select the direction in which pictures are joined in the
completed panorama: right (I), left (J), up (K) or
down (L).
• The yellow icon (II) moves to the direction pressed,
1342
1/250 F5.6
so press the k button to choose the direction. A white
icon (I) is displayed in the chosen direction.
• Apply flash mode (A61), self-timer (A64)/remote control (E105), focus mode
(A67) and exposure compensation (A71) settings with this step, if necessary.
• Press the k button again to reselect the direction.
Using Panorama Assist
5
Shoot the next picture.
• Match the outline of the next picture so that
1/3 of the frame overlaps the previous
picture, and press the shutter-release button.
• Repeat until you have taken the necessary
number of pictures to complete the image.
6
End
1341
Press the k button when shooting is completed.
• The camera returns to step 3.
Reference Section
B
Notes on Panorama Assist
• Set the flash mode, self-timer/remote control, focus mode and exposure compensation before
releasing the shutter for the first picture. The settings cannot be changed after shooting the first
picture. Pictures cannot be deleted, nor can zoom, Image quality (A75), or Image size (A77)
be adjusted after shooting the first picture.
• The panorama series is terminated if the auto off function (E82) triggers the standby mode
during shooting. To prevent this, setting a longer time for the auto off function is recommended.
C
R (exposure lock) Indicator
When using panorama assist mode, all pictures in the panorama
have the same exposure, white balance, and focus as the first
picture of the panorama.
When the first picture is shot, R is displayed on the monitor
to indicate that exposure, white balance, and focus are locked.
C
End
1341
Panorama Creation
Transfer pictures taken to a computer (A94) and use Panorama Maker 5 to join them in a single
panorama.
Install Panorama Maker 5 on a computer using the included ViewNX 2 CD.
C
More Information
See “File and Folder Names” (E99) for more information.
E4
A, B, C, D Modes
A (Programmed Auto), B (Shutter-Priority Auto) or
C (Aperture-Priority Auto)
1
Rotate the mode dial to A, B or C.
1/250
2
F5.6
1342
Rotate the command dial to set the exposure.
• In A mode, the flexible program (A53) can be set.
• In B mode, the shutter speed can be set in a range from a maximum speed of
1/2000 to 8 seconds.
• In C mode, the aperture value can be set in a range of f/2.8 to 8 (wide-angle position)
and f/5.6 to 8 (telephoto zoom position).
3
Frame the subject and shoot.
Reference Section
• In the default setting, the camera has nine focus areas,
and automatically selects the focus areas containing the
subject closest to the camera. When the subject is in
focus, the focus area (active focus area) lights in green
(maximum of nine areas) (E48).
E5
A, B, C, D Modes
B
Notes on Shooting
• When zooming is performed after the exposure is set, exposure combinations or aperture value
may be changed.
• When the subject is too dark or too bright, it may not be possible to obtain the appropriate
exposure. In such cases, the shutter speed indicator or aperture value indicator blinks when the
shutter-release button is pressed halfway. Change the shutter speed setting or aperture value.
When settings such as Built-in ND filter (E85) or ISO sensitivity (E30) are changed, the
appropriate exposure may be obtained.
• At shutter speeds of 1/4 second or slower, noise may appear in the image. In such situations, the
shutter speed indicator lights in red. Setting Long exposure NR (E53) to On is recommended.
C
Shutter Speed
• The control range of the shutter speed differs depending on the ISO sensitivity setting.
Additionally, the range is restricted during continuous shooting (A83).
• When the zoom is on the wide-angle position and the aperture value is set to f/8 (minimum
aperture), the shutter speed can be set to up to 1/4000 seconds.
C
More Information
See “Customize Command Dials” (E86) for more information.
Reference Section
E6
A, B, C, D Modes
D (Manual) Mode
The user controls both the shutter speed and aperture value.
• The shutter speed can be set in a range from a maximum speed of 1/4000 to 60 seconds.
1
Rotate the mode dial to D.
2
Rotate the main command dial to
choose a shutter speed value.
• At shutter speeds of 1/4 second or slower,
the shutter speed indicator lights in red
(E5).
• See A53 for more information on
exposure indicator.
3
1/125
F5.6
1342
Exposure indicator
• Repeat steps 2 to 3 to modify shutter
speed and aperture value settings until the
desired exposure is achieved.
1/125
4
F8.0
1342
Focus and shoot.
• In the default setting, the camera has nine focus areas,
and automatically selects the focus areas containing
the subject closest to the camera. When the subject is
in focus, the focus area (active focus area) lights in
green (maximum of nine areas) (E48).
E7
Reference Section
Rotate the sub-command dial to
choose an aperture value.
A, B, C, D Modes
B
Note on Shooting
When zooming is performed after the exposure is set, aperture value may be changed.
B
Note on ISO Sensitivity
When ISO sensitivity (E30) is set to Auto (default setting), High ISO sensitivity auto, ISO 100200 or ISO 100-400, ISO sensitivity is fixed at ISO 100.
C
Shutter Speed
• A shutter speed of 1/4000 second is available only when the zoom is at the wide-angle position
and the aperture value is set to f/8 (minimum aperture).
• The control range of the shutter speed differs depending on the ISO sensitivity setting.
Additionally, the range is restricted during continuous shooting (A83).
Reference Section
E8
Editing Still Images
Editing Features
Images can be easily edited with this camera using the functions below. Edited
images are stored as separate files (E99).
Editing function
Application
Quick retouch (E11)
Easily create a copy with enhanced contrast and richer colors.
D-Lighting (E11)
Create a copy of the current picture with enhanced brightness
and contrast, brightening dark portions of the picture.
Make the facial skin tones softer.
Filter effects (E13)
Apply a variety of effects using digital filter. The available effects
are Soft, Selective color, Cross screen, Fisheye, Miniature
effect and Painting.
Small picture (E14)
Create a small copy of pictures suitable for uses such as e-mail
attachments.
Black border (E15)
Add a black frame around the picture. Use when you want to
add a black border to a picture.
Straighten (E16)
Compensate for the slanting.
NRW (RAW) processing
(E17)
Create JPEG-format copies by performing RAW processing
within the camera for NRW (RAW) images (A75) without
having to use a computer.
Crop (E19)
Crop a portion of the picture. Use to zoom in on a subject or
arrange a composition.
B
Reference Section
Skin softening (E12)
Notes on Image Editing
• Pictures shot with an Image size (A77) of I 3648×2432, z 3584×2016, or H 2736×2736
can only be modified using the black border editing function.
Still pictures extracted from movies recorded with n HD 720p (1280×720) can also only be
modified using the black border editing function.
• When no faces are detected in the picture, skin softening cannot be applied (E12).
• Editing other than NRW (RAW) processing cannot be performed on NRW (RAW) images. Edit a
JPEG image created with NRW (RAW) processing.
• The COOLPIX P7100’s editing functions are not available for pictures taken with cameras other
than COOLPIX P7100.
• If a copy created using the COOLPIX P7100 is viewed on a different digital camera, it may not be
possible to display the picture properly or transfer it to a computer.
• Editing functions are not available when there is not enough free space in the internal memory or
on the memory card.
E9
Editing Still Images
C
Restrictions on Image Editing
The following restrictions apply when editing pictures that were created by editing.
Editing functions used
Editing functions to add
Quick retouch
D-Lighting
Skin softening, Small picture, Black border or Crop can be used.
Quick retouch and D-Lighting cannot be used in combination
with each other.
Skin softening
NRW (RAW) processing
Additional editing functions can be used.
Filter effects
Skin softening, Small picture or Straighten can be used.
Small picture
No additional editing functions can be used.
Black border
Small picture can be used.
Straighten
Small picture or Black border can be used.
Crop
Black border or Straighten can be used.
When the image size is 320 × 240 or smaller, straighten cannot
be performed.
Reference Section
• Copies created by editing cannot be edited again using the same editing function.
• To use an editing function together with small picture, use the other editing function first, and use
small picture as the last editing function performed on that picture.
• Pictures that were taken using skin softening can be edited using skin softening.
C
Original Pictures and Edited Copies
• Copies created with editing functions are not deleted if the original pictures are deleted. The
original pictures are not deleted if copies created with editing functions are deleted.
• Edited copies are stored with the same shooting date and time as the original.
• Even if the pictures that are marked for Print order (E60) or Protect (E66) are used for
editing, these settings are not reflected on the edited copies.
E10
Editing Still Images
k Quick Retouch: Enhancing Contrast and Saturation
Select a picture (A34) M d button M c tab (A13) M k Quick retouch
Press the multi selector H or I to choose the
setting level, and press the k button.
Quick retouch
• The original version is displayed on the left and the
edited version is displayed on the right.
• To cancel, press J.
• Quick retouched copies can be recognized by the s
icon displayed in playback mode.
Normal
Amount
15/11/2011 15:30
0004.JPG
4 132
Reference Section
I D-Lighting: Enhancing Brightness and Contrast
Select a picture (A34) M d button M c tab (A13) M I D-Lighting
Press the multi selector H or I to choose the
setting level, and press the k button.
• The original version is displayed on the left and the
edited version is displayed on the right.
• To cancel, press J.
• D-Lighting copies can be recognized by the c icon
displayed in playback mode.
D-Lighting
Normal
Amount
15/11/2011 15:30
0004.JPG
4 132
C
More Information
See “File and Folder Names” (E99) for more information.
E11
Editing Still Images
e Skin Softening: Softening Skin Tones
Select a picture (A34) M d button M c tab (A13) M e Skin softening
1
Press the multi selector H or I to choose the
setting level, and press the k button.
Skin softening
• A confirmation screen is displayed, and the image is
displayed zoomed in on the face edited by skin
softening.
• To cancel, press J.
2
Confirm the results.
Reference Section
• Up to 12 faces, in order of proximity to the center of the
frame, can be enhanced.
• When multiple faces are edited using skin softening,
use the multi selector J or K to switch the face that is
displayed.
Back
• To adjust the extent of skin softening, press the d
button and return to step 1.
• To create a copy edited with skin softening, press the k button.
• Copies created by editing with skin softening can be
15/11/2011
0004.JPG
recognized by the E icon displayed in playback mode.
Normal
Amount
Preview
Save
15:30
4 132
B
Notes on Skin Softening
• Depending on conditions such as the direction the subject is facing or the brightness of the face,
the face may not be detected properly, or the desired effect may not be achieved.
• If no faces are detected in the image, a warning is displayed and the screen returns to the playback
menu.
C
More Information
See “File and Folder Names” (E99) for more information.
E12
Editing Still Images
p Filter Effects: Applying Digital Filter Effects
Select a picture (A34) M d button M c tab (A13) M p Filter effects
Option
Description
Soft
Gently soften the focus of the image from the center to the
edge. In pictures taken with face detection (A85) or pet
detection (A45) selected, areas around faces will be blurred.
Selective color
Keep only selected image colors and makes other colors blackand-white.
Cross screen
Produce star-like rays of light that radiate outward from bright
objects such as sunlight reflections and city lights. Suitable for
night scenes.
Fisheye
Create images that look like they were shot with a fisheye lens.
Suitable for pictures shot in macro mode.
Miniature effect
Create images that look like close-up photos of a diorama.
Suitable for pictures shot while looking down from a high
location, with the main subject near the center of the frame.
Painting
Create images with the ambience of paintings.
Press the multi selector H or I to choose the
filter effect type and press the k button.
• When Cross screen, Fisheye, Miniature effect or
Painting is selected, proceed to step 3.
2
Adjust the effect and press the k button.
Reference Section
1
Filter effects
Soft
Selective color
Cross screen
Fisheye
Miniature effect
Painting
Soft
• Soft: Press H or I to choose the extent of the effect.
• Selective color: Press H or I to select the color to
keep.
Normal
Extent
Soft
E13
Editing Still Images
3
Check the effect and press the k button.
Preview
• A new, edited copy is created.
• To cancel, press J.
Back
• Copies created by editing with filter effect can be
recognized by the c icon displayed in playback mode.
Save
15/11/2011 15:30
0004.JPG
4 132
g Small Picture: Reducing the Size of an Image
Select a picture (A34) M d button M c tab (A13) M g Small picture
Reference Section
1
Press the multi selector H or I to choose the
desired copy size and press the k button.
• The available size is 640×480, 320×240 or 160×120.
2
More Information
See “File and Folder Names” (E99) for more information.
E14
640×480
320×240
160×120
Choose Yes and press the k button.
• A new, smaller copy is created.
• Image quality is saved as Basic (compression ratio of
about 1:16).
• To cancel, choose No and press the k button.
• The copy is displayed with a black frame.
C
Small picture
Create small picture file?
Yes
No
Editing Still Images
j Black Border: Adding a Black Border to Pictures
Select a picture (A34) M d button M c tab (A13) M j Black border
1
Press the multi selector H or I to choose the
desired frame thickness and press the k
button.
Black border
Thin
Medium
Broad
• Choose from Thin, Medium, or Broad lines.
2
Choose Yes and press the k button.
• A new copy with a black border is created.
• To cancel, choose No and press the k button.
Create a copy with a
black border?
Yes
No
• Copies created by editing with black borders can be
recognized by the J icon displayed in playback mode.
Reference Section
B
Notes on Black Border
• A part of the picture equivalent to the thickness of the black border is cut off because the black
border overlaps the picture.
• When a picture with a black border is printed using a printer’s borderless print function, the black
border may not be printed.
C
More Information
See “File and Folder Names” (E99) for more information.
E15
Editing Still Images
R Straighten: Compensating for Picture Slanting
Select a picture (A34) M d button M c tab (A13) M R Straighten
Use the multi selector to compensate for slanting.
Press J to rotate counterclockwise by 1 degree.
Press K to rotate clockwise by 1 degree.
To cancel, press the d button.
To create a copy edited with straighten, press the k
button.
• Copies created by editing with straighten can be
recognized by the G icon displayed in playback mode.
Straighten
•
•
•
•
Back
Rotate
15/11/2011 15:30
0004.JPG
4 132
Reference Section
B
Notes on Straighten
• When straighten is performed, the picture edges are cut. The larger the slant for which
compensation is performed, the larger the area around the picture that is cut.
• Straighten can be performed up to 15 degrees.
C
More Information
See “File and Folder Names” (E99) for more information.
E16
Editing Still Images
F NRW (RAW) Processing: Creating JPEG Images from
NRW Images
Press the d button M c tab (A13) M F NRW (RAW) processing
1
Use the multi selector to choose the picture to
be RAW processed and press the k button.
NRW (RAW) processing
Back
2
Set the NRW (RAW) processing parameters.
NRW (RAW) processing
3
Reference Section
EXE
• Apply the settings below while checking the image
and rotating the zoom control toward g (i). Rotate
toward g (i) again to return to the setting screen.
- White balance: Choose a white balance setting
other than Auto (warm lighting) (E32).
Reset
Check
- Exp. +/-: Adjust the brightness.
- Picture Control: Change the settings for finish of the image (E38).
- Image quality: Choose the image quality from Fine, Normal, or Basic (A75).
- Image size: Choose an image size (A77). The image is cropped if I 3648×2432,
z 3584×2016 or H 2736×2736 is selected.
- Distortion control: Set the distortion control (E54).
- D-Lighting: Enhance brightness and contrast in dark portions of pictures (E11).
• Press the l button to change back to the default settings.
• Choose EXE when all settings have been adjusted.
Choose Yes and press the k button.
• An NRW (RAW) processed JPEG image is created.
• To cancel the creation, choose No.
Create a JPEG copy at these
settings?
Yes
No
E17
Editing Still Images
B
Notes on NRW (RAW) Processing
• The COOLPIX P7100 can only create JPEG-format copies of NRW (RAW) images taken with the
COOLPIX P7100.
• NRW (RAW) processing > White balance > Preset manual cannot be selected for photographs
taken at a White balance setting other than Preset manual.
C
More Information
• See “Printing Images of Size 1:1” (A79) for more information.
• See “File and Folder Names” (E99) for more information.
Reference Section
E18
Editing Still Images
a Crop: Creating a Cropped Copy
Create a copy containing only the portion visible on the monitor when u is
displayed with playback zoom (A35) enabled. Cropped copies are stored as
separate files.
1
2
Enlarge the picture for cropping (A35).
Refine copy composition.
• Rotate the zoom control toward g (i) or f (h) to
adjust the zoom ratio.
• Press the multi selector H, I, J or K to scroll the
picture until only the portion you want to copy is
visible on the monitor.
3
Press the d button.
Use the multi selector to choose Yes and press
the k button.
• A new picture, containing only the portion visible on the
monitor, is created.
• To cancel, choose No and press the k button.
C
Reference Section
4
4.0
Save this image as
displayed?
Yes
No
Image Size
The narrower the cropping range, the smaller the size (amount of pixels) of the cropped picture
copy. When the image size setting for a cropped copy is 320×240 or 160×120, a black frame appears
around the picture during playback, and the C small picture icon is displayed on the left side of the
monitor.
C
Cropping the Picture in its Current “Tall” Orientation
Use the Rotate image option (E66) to rotate the picture so that it is displayed in landscape
orientation. After cropping the picture, rotate the cropped picture back to “tall” orientation. The
picture displayed in “tall” orientation can be cropped by zooming in on the picture until the black
bars displayed on the both sides of the monitor disappear. The cropped picture is displayed in
landscape orientation.
C
More Information
See “File and Folder Names” (E99) for more information.
E19
Connecting the Camera to a TV (Viewing Images on a TV)
Connect the camera to a television to play back pictures on the television.
If your television is equipped with an HDMI connector, you can connect it to the
camera with a commercially available HDMI cable to play back pictures.
1
Turn off the camera.
2
Connect the camera to the TV.
When connecting using the included audio/video cable
• Connect the yellow plug to the video-in jack on the TV, and the red and white plugs
to the audio-in jacks.
Yellow White Red
Reference Section
When connecting using a commercially available HDMI cable
• Connect the plug to the HDMI jack on the TV.
To the HDMI jack
HDMI mini
connector (Type C)
E20
Connecting the Camera to a TV (Viewing Images on a TV)
3
Tune the television to the video channel.
• See the instruction manual provided with your television for details.
4
Hold down the c button to turn on the
camera.
• The camera enters playback mode, and the recorded
pictures are displayed on the television.
• While the camera is connected to the TV, the monitor
remains off.
B
Notes on Connecting an HDMI Cable
B
Notes on Connecting the Audio/Video Cable
• When connecting the cable, be sure that the plug is oriented correctly. Do not force the plug into
the camera. When disconnecting the cable, do not pull the plug at an angle.
• Do not connect cables to the HDMI mini connector and USB/audio video connector
simultaneously.
B
Reference Section
• An HDMI cable is not included. Use a commercially available HDMI cable to connect the camera to
a TV. The output terminal on this camera is a HDMI Mini Connector (Type C). When purchasing an
HDMI cable, be sure that the device end of the cable is a HDMI Mini Connector.
• We recommend shooting still pictures with Image size (A77) set to C 2048×1536 or higher,
and recording movies with Movie options (E42) set to n HD 720p (1280×720).
When Nothing Appears on the TV
Make sure that TV settings (E84) in the setup menu is appropriate for your television.
C
Using the TV’s Remote Control (HDMI Device Control)
The remote control of a TV that conforms to the HDMI-CEC standard can be used to operate the
camera during playback.
Instead of the multi selector or zoom control, the remote control can be used for picture selection,
and switching between movies, full-frame playback and four thumbnails display.
• Set HDMI device control (E84) of TV settings to On (default setting) in the setup menu, and
connect the camera to the TV with an HDMI cable.
• Point the remote control at the TV to operate.
• See your TV’s instruction manual or other related documentation to check whether your TV
supports the HDMI-CEC standard.
E21
Connecting the Camera to a Printer (Direct Print)
Users of PictBridge-compatible (F16) printers can connect the camera directly to
the printer and print pictures without using a computer. The steps for printing are
as follows.
Take pictures
Choose the pictures for printing
using the print order option
(Print order: E60)
Connect the camera to the printer (E23)
Print individual pictures
(E24)
Print multiple pictures (E25)
Reference Section
When printing is complete, turn the camera off and disconnect the USB cable
B
Notes on Power Source
• When connecting the camera to a printer, use a fully charged battery to prevent the camera from
turning off unexpectedly.
• If the AC Adapter EH-5b and the Power Connector EP-5A (available separately) (E103) are used,
COOLPIX P7100 can be powered from an electrical outlet. Do not, under any circumstances, use
an AC Adapter other than the EH-5b or a Power Connector other than the EP-5A. Failure to
observe this precaution could result in overheating or damage to the camera.
C
Printing Pictures
In addition to printing pictures transferred to a computer and printing pictures with a direct camerato-printer connection, the following options are also available for printing pictures recorded on the
memory card:
• Insert a memory card into a DPOF-compatible printer’s card slot.
• Take a memory card to a digital photo lab.
For printing using these methods, specify the pictures and the number of prints each using the
Print order (E60) option in the playback menu.
E22
Connecting the Camera to a Printer (Direct Print)
Connecting the Camera to a Printer
1
Turn off the camera.
2
Turn on the printer.
• Check the printer settings.
3
Connect the camera to the printer using the included USB cable.
• Be sure that the plug is oriented correctly. When disconnecting the cable, do not pull
the plug at an angle.
Reference Section
4
Turn on the camera.
• When connected correctly, the PictBridge startup
screen (1) is displayed on the camera monitor. Then
the Print selection screen (2) is displayed.
1
2
Print selection
15/11
2011
NO. 32
32
E23
Connecting the Camera to a Printer (Direct Print)
Printing Individual Images
After connecting the camera to the printer correctly (E23), print pictures by
following the procedure below.
1
Use the multi selector to choose the picture to
be printed and press the k button.
Print selection
15/11
2011
• Pictures can also be chosen by rotating the main
command dial.
• Rotate the zoom control toward f (h) to display
12 thumbnails, or toward g (i) to switch back to fullframe playback mode.
2
Choose Copies and press the k button.
NO. 32
32
PictBridge
001 prints
Start print
Copies
Paper size
Reference Section
3
Choose the number of copies (up to nine) and
press the k button.
Copies
4
4
Choose Paper size and press the k button.
PictBridge
004 prints
Start print
Copies
Paper size
C
More Information
See “Printing Images of Size 1:1” (A79) for more information.
E24
Connecting the Camera to a Printer (Direct Print)
5
Choose the desired paper size and press the
k button.
• To specify the paper size using the printer settings,
choose Default in the paper size menu.
6
Choose Start print and press the k button.
Paper size
Default
3.5×5 in.
5×7 in.
100×150 mm
4×6 in.
8×10 in.
Letter
PictBridge
004 prints
Start print
Copies
Paper size
7
Printing starts.
• The monitor display returns to that shown in step 1
when printing is complete.
• To cancel before all copies have been printed, press
the k button.
Printing
002 / 004
Cancel
After connecting the camera to the printer correctly (E23), print pictures by
following the procedure below.
1
Reference Section
Printing Multiple Images
Current print/total
number of prints
When the Print selection screen is displayed,
press the d button.
• The Print menu is displayed.
2
Use the multi selector to choose Paper size
and press the k button.
• To exit the print menu, press the d button.
Print menu
Print selection
Print all images
DPOF printing
Paper size
E25
Connecting the Camera to a Printer (Direct Print)
3
Choose the desired paper size and press the
k button.
• To specify the paper size using the printer settings,
choose Default in the paper size menu.
4
Choose Print selection, Print all images or
DPOF printing and press the k button.
Paper size
Default
3.5×5 in.
5×7 in.
100×150 mm
4×6 in.
8×10 in.
Letter
Print menu
Print selection
Print all images
DPOF printing
Paper size
Print selection
Reference Section
Choose the pictures (up to a maximum of 99)
Print selection
10
and number of copies (up to nine per picture).
• Press the multi selector J or K to choose the
1
1
2
3
pictures, and press H or I to set the number
of copies for each.
• Pictures can also be chosen by rotating the
main command dial.
Back
• Pictures selected for printing can be
recognized by the check mark icon and the
numeral indicating the number of copies to be printed. A check mark is not
displayed with pictures for which no copies have been specified and these
pictures are not printed.
• Rotate the zoom control toward g (i) to switch to full-frame playback mode,
or f (h) to switch to 12 thumbnails display.
• Press the k button when setting is complete.
• When the menu shown on the right is
Print selection
displayed, choose Start print and press the
k button to start printing.
010 prints
• Choose Cancel and press the k button to
return to the print menu.
Start print
Cancel
E26
Connecting the Camera to a Printer (Direct Print)
Print all images
All pictures stored in the internal memory or on
the memory card are printed one per each.
• When the menu shown on the right is
displayed, choose Start print and press the
k button to start printing.
• Choose Cancel and press the k button to
return to the print menu.
Print all images
018 prints
Start print
Cancel
DPOF printing
Pictures for which a print order was created in
Print order option (E60) can be printed.
• When the menu shown on the right is
displayed, choose Start print and press the
k button to start printing.
• Choose Cancel and press the k button to
return to the print menu.
• To view the current print order, choose View
images and press the k button. To print
pictures, press the k button again.
DPOF printing
010 prints
Start print
View images
Cancel
View images
10
5
Printing starts.
• The monitor display returns to that shown in step 2
when printing is complete.
• To cancel before all copies have been printed, press
the k button.
Printing
002 / 010
Reference Section
Back
Cancel
Current print/total
number of prints
C
Paper Size
The camera supports the following paper sizes: Default (the default paper size for the current
printer), 3.5×5 in., 5×7 in., 100×150 mm, 4×6 in., 8×10 in., Letter, A3, and A4. Only sizes
supported by the current printer are displayed.
E27
Editing Movies
Extracting Only the Desired Portions of the Movie
The desired portions of a recorded movie can be saved as a separate file.
1
Play back the movie to be edited and pause at the start point of the
portion that is to be extracted (A102).
2
Use the multi selector J or K to choose I
on the playback control and press the k
button.
• The movie editing screen is displayed.
7m42s
3
Press H or I to choose J (Choose start
point) on the editing playback control.
• Rotate the multi selector or press J or K to adjust the
start position.
• To cancel, press H or I to choose L (Back) and press
the k button.
Reference Section
4
Press H or I to choose K (Choose end
point).
Choose start point
8m48s
Choose end point
• Rotate the multi selector or press J or K to move the
end point at the right end to the end position of the
required section.
• To check the playback of the movie in the specified
5m52s
range before saving it, choose c (Preview) and press
the k button. During preview playback, the volume
can be adjusted with the zoom control g/f. Use the multi selector to fast forward or
rewind. To stop the preview playback, press the k button.
5
6
After finishing the settings, press H or I to choose m (Save) and press
the k button.
Choose Yes and press the k button.
• The edited movie is saved.
• To cancel the saving, choose No.
Save OK?
Yes
No
E28
Editing Movies
B
Notes on Editing Movies
• Once a movie is created through editing, it cannot be used again for extracting a movie. To extract
another range, select and edit the original movie.
• Because the edited movies are extracted in 1-second units, they may vary slightly from the set start
point and end point. Sections shorter than two seconds cannot be extracted.
• Editing functions are not available when there is not enough free space in the internal memory or
on the memory card.
C
More Information
See “File and Folder Names” (E99) for more information.
Saving a Frame from a Movie as a Still Picture
A screen from a recorded movie can be extracted and saved as a still picture.
• Pause a movie and display the screen to be extracted
(A102).
• Choose H on the playback control with the multi
selector J or K and press the k button.
7m42s
7m42
Movie type
Yes
No
Size of still picture
n HD 720p (1280×720)
R (1280×720)
m VGA (640×480)
S (640×480)
W QVGA (320×240)
s (320×240)
C
Copy this frame as a still image?
Reference Section
• When the confirmation dialog is displayed, choose
Yes and press the k button to save. To cancel the
saving, choose No.
• The still picture is saved with Normal as the image
quality. The image size is determined by the type
(image size) (E42) of the original movie.
Note on Saving a Still Picture
A black frame is displayed around the picture saved with s (320×240) during playback.
E29
Quick Menu
a Image Quality and Image Size
To set the image quality and image size, see “Changing the Image Quality and
Image Size” (A74).
b Sensitivity (Setting the ISO sensitivity)
Rotate the mode dial to A, B, C or D M b (Quick menu dial) (A72) M ISO sensitivity
The higher the ISO sensitivity, the less light needed for taking pictures.
The higher the ISO sensitivity, the darker the subject that can be shot. Additionally,
even with subjects of similar brightness, pictures can be taken at faster shutter
speeds, and blurring caused by camera shake and subject movement can be
reduced.
• Setting the ISO sensitivity to a high level is effective when shooting dark
subjects, not using the flash, shooting at the telephoto zoom position and
similar situations, but the pictures taken may be slightly grainy.
1
Reference Section
Press the multi selector J or K to choose the
ISO sensitivity setting.
• Items can also be chosen by rotating the main
command dial.
• Press the multi selector I when the ISO sensitivity is
set to Auto, High ISO sensitivity auto, ISO 100-200
or ISO 100-400 to proceed to step 2.
• If the ISO sensitivity is fixed, proceed to step 3.
2
ISO sensitivity
Minimum shutter speed
Auto
Choose the minimum shutter speed.
• Press the multi selector H to return to the ISO
sensitivity setting.
ISO sensitivity
Minimum shutter speed
None
3
After completing the settings, press the quick menu button or the k
button.
• The monitor display reverts to shooting screen.
E30
Quick Menu
Types of ISO Sensitivity
Option
Description
Minimum
shutter speed
When the shooting mode is A or C and ISO sensitivity is set to Auto,
High ISO sensitivity auto, ISO 100-200 or ISO 100-400, the shutter
speed at which the ISO sensitivity automatic control starts to function
(1/125 to one second) is set. The default setting is None. If the exposure
is insufficient with the shutter speed that is set here, the ISO sensitivity is
increased automatically to obtain the correct exposure. If the exposure
is still insufficient even after the ISO sensitivity is increased, the shutter
speed slows down.
The icon for the current setting is displayed on the monitor (A8).
• When Auto is selected, the E icon is not displayed at ISO 100, but is displayed
if the ISO sensitivity automatically increases to more than 100 (A30).
• When High ISO sensitivity auto is selected, the V icon is displayed. When
ISO 100-200 or ISO 100-400 is selected, the U icon and the maximum ISO
sensitivity value are displayed.
B
Reference Section
ISO sensitivity
• a Auto (default setting): The sensitivity is ISO 100 in bright
places; in dark places the camera automatically raises the sensitivity
to a maximum of ISO 800.
• B High ISO sensitivity auto: The ISO sensitivity is set automatically
within the range of ISO 100 to 1600 according to the brightness of
the subject.
• x ISO 100-200, y ISO 100-400 (fixed range auto):
Choose the range in which the camera automatically adjusts ISO
sensitivity. The camera does not raise sensitivity beyond the
maximum value in the selected range. Set the maximum value for ISO
sensitivity to control “grain” that appears in images.
• 100, 200, 400, 800, 1600, 3200, Hi 1 (equivalent to ISO 6400):
ISO sensitivity is locked at the specified value.
Notes on ISO Sensitivity
• In D (manual) mode, ISO sensitivity is fixed at ISO 100 if Auto, High ISO sensitivity auto, ISO
100-200 or ISO 100-400 is selected.
• This feature may not be used in combination with certain features. See “Features That Cannot Be
Used Simultaneously” (A80) for more information.
E31
Quick Menu
c White Balance (Matching Image Colors with Colors as
Seen with the Naked Eye)
Rotate the mode dial to A, B, C, D, O or D M c (Quick menu dial) (A72) M White
balance
The color of light reflected from an object varies with the color of the light source.
The human brain is able to adapt to changes in the color of the light source, with
the result that white objects appear white whether seen in the shade, direct
sunlight, or under incandescent lighting. Digital cameras can mimic this
adjustment of the human eye by processing images according to the color of the
light source. This is known as “white balance.” For natural coloration, choose a
white balance setting that matches the light source before shooting.
Although the default setting, Auto (normal), can be used under most types of
lighting, you can apply the white balance setting suited to a particular light source
to achieve more accurate results.
1
Press the multi selector J or K to choose the
type of white balance.
Reference Section
• Items can also be chosen by rotating the main
command dial.
• When x is chosen, set the color temperature (E34)
using Choose color temp.
• To perform fine adjustment of the white balance
setting, choose Fine-tune and press the k button.
2
White balance
Choose color temp.
Fine-tune
Auto (normal)
After completing the settings, press the quick menu button or the k
button.
• The monitor display reverts to shooting screen.
C
Fine Adjustment of White Balance
Press the multi selector H, I, J or K to set fine adjustment value.
• The four directions are A (amber), B (blue), G (green) and M
Fine-tune
(magenta), and fine adjustment can be performed in six levels in all
directions.
• When the l button is pressed, the fine adjustment value is reset to
the center (coordinate 0, 0).
• Rotate the sub-command dial to return to the screen in step 1.
Back
Reset
The color displayed in the fine-tune screen for white balance
represents the approximate color in the color temperature direction.
When a color is set in the fine-tune screen, it may not be reproduced exactly in the image. For example,
when the white balance is set to Incandescent, the image will not have a strong blue color even if fine
adjustment is performed in the B (blue) direction.
E32
Quick Menu
Types of White Balance
Option
Description
Auto (normal)
a1 (default
setting)
Auto (warm
lighting)
c
Daylight
The white balance is adjusted for direct sunlight.
d
Incandescent
Use under incandescent lighting.
e
Fluorescent
(FL1 to FL3)
Use under most types of fluorescent lighting. Choose one of
FL1 (white fluorescent), FL2 (daylight white/neutral
fluorescent) and FL3 (daylight fluorescent).
f
Cloudy
Use when shooting under overcast skies.
g
Flash
Use with the flash.
x
Choose color
temp.
Use to directly specify the color temperature (E34).
b
Preset manual
(1 to 3)
Useful when shooting under unusual lighting. See “Using Preset
Manual” (E35) for more information.
The icon for the current setting other than Auto (normal) is displayed on the
monitor (A8).
B
Reference Section
a2
The white balance is automatically adjusted to suit the lighting
conditions. Default setting is suitable for most situations.
When set to Auto (warm lighting), the images are preserved
with warm colors if they are shot under an incandescent light
source. When using the flash, according to the brightness of the
flash, the images are adjusted to suitable white balance.
Notes on White Balance
• At white balance settings other than Auto (normal), Auto (warm lighting) or Flash, set the
flash mode to W (off) (A61).
• This feature may not be used in combination with certain features. See “Features That Cannot Be
Used Simultaneously” (A80) for more information.
E33
Quick Menu
C
Color Temperature
The perceived color of a light source varies with the viewer and other conditions. Color temperature
is an objective measure of the color of a light source, defined with reference to the temperature to
which an object would have to be heated to radiate light in the same wavelengths. While light
sources with a color temperature in the neighborhood of 5000–5500K appear white, light sources
with a lower color temperature, such as incandescent light bulbs, appear slightly yellow or red. Light
sources with a higher color temperature appear tinged with blue. The camera white balance options
are adapted to the following color temperatures.
Red
Blue
3000
1
2
4000
3
5000 6000
4
567 8
8000
9
0 a
1 Sodium-vapor lamps: 2700K
7 Flash: 5400K
Incandescent/
2 Warm-white fluorescent: 3000K
8 Cloudy: 6000K
Reference Section
3 White fluorescent: 3700K
4 Cool-white fluorescent: 4200K
5 Day white fluorescent: 5000K
6 Direct sunlight: 5200K
E34
10000 [K]
9 Daylight fluorescent: 6500K
0 High temp. mercury-vapor: 7200K
a Shade: 8000K
Quick Menu
Using Preset Manual
Use when you want to make pictures taken under unusual lighting conditions
(such as lamps with reddish light) look as though they were shot in normal light.
Use the procedure below to shoot after measuring the white balance value under
the shooting light.
• Up to three preset values can be saved: PRE1, PRE2 and PRE3.
1
Place a white or gray reference object under the lighting that will be
used during shooting.
2
Display the white balance quick menu (E32)
and press the multi selector J or K to choose
PRE1, PRE2 or PRE3.
• Items can also be chosen by rotating the main
command dial.
3
Press I to choose Preset manual and press J
or K to choose PRE.
Preset manual 1
White balance
Preset manual
Fine-tune
Reference Section
• The lens extends to the zoom position for
measurement.
White balance
Preset manual
Fine-tune
Cancel
4
Frame a white or gray reference object in the
reference object frame and press the k
button.
• The shutter is released and the new white balance
preset value is set (no picture is recorded).
B
Measure
Notes on Preset Manual
Reference object frame
• The camera cannot measure a white balance value for when the
flash fires. When shooting with the flash, set White balance to
Auto (normal), Auto (warm lighting) or Flash.
• When a wide-angle converter is mounted, preset manual cannot be used. Further, the preset value
cannot be measured.
C
Using the Previously Measured White Balance Value
Choose f in step 3. The most recently measured value is set for white balance, without performing
measurement again.
C
Performing Fine Adjustment for the Measured White Balance Value
After selecting preset PRE1, PRE2 or PRE3, select Fine-tune and press the k button to perform fine
adjustment for white balance (E32).
E35
Quick Menu
d Bracketing (Continuous Shooting While Changing the
Shutter Speed, ISO Sensitivity and White Balance)
Rotate the mode dial to A, B, C or D M d (Quick menu dial) (A72) M Auto
bracketing
Continuous shooting can be performed while changing the exposure (brightness)
automatically with the shutter speed (Tv) or ISO sensitivity (Sv), or multiple pictures
can be recorded while varying the white balance (WB). This is effective when
adjusting the brightness of an image is difficult, or when multiple light sources are
mixed together and it is difficult to decide the white balance.
1
Press the multi selector J or K to choose the
type of bracketing, and press I.
• Items can also be chosen by rotating the main
command dial.
2
Choose the number of pictures to shoot and
press I.
Reference Section
• 3 or 5 pictures can be chosen.
3
Choose the range of increment correction and
press I.
• For e (exposure bracketing (Tv)) or r (exposure
bracketing (Sv)), choose 0.3, 0.7 or 1.
• For s (white balance bracketing), choose 1, 2 or 3.
4
Choose the bracketing range and press the
quick menu button or the k button.
• The monitor display reverts to shooting screen.
• To change the values to the default setting, select
Reset and press the k button.
C
More Information
See “Reverse Indicators” (E94) for more information.
E36
Auto bracketing
Number of shots
Increment
Range
Reset
Auto bracketing
Number of shots
Increment
Range
Reset
Auto bracketing
Number of shots
Increment
Range
Reset
Auto bracketing
Number of shots
Increment
Range
Reset
Quick Menu
Types of Auto Bracketing
Description
Option
Bracketing is not performed.
e
Exposure
bracketing (Tv)
Set the number of pictures to shoot continuously, the range of
exposure increments, and the bracketing range. When the
shutter-release button is pressed all the way, pictures are shot
continuously while the shutter speed is adjusted automatically.
• “Tv” means “Time value.”
Exposure
bracketing (Sv)
Set the number of pictures to shoot continuously, the range of
ISO sensitivity increments, and the bracketing range. When the
shutter-release button is pressed all the way, pictures are shot
continuously while changing the ISO sensitivity, with the
shutter speed and aperture value fixed.
• “Sv” means “Sensitivity value.”
White balance
bracketing
Set the number of pictures to record, the range of color
temperature compensation increments, and the bracketing
range.
When the shutter-release button is pressed all the way, one
picture is shot, and the set number of pictures is recorded with
the color temperature changed for each one.
r
s
The icon for the current setting other than OFF is displayed on the monitor (A8).
B
Reference Section
k
OFF (default
setting)
Notes on Auto Bracketing
• Exposure bracketing (Tv) and Exposure bracketing (Sv) are not available in D (manual)
mode.
• Exposure bracketing (Tv) is not available in B (Shutter-priority auto) mode.
• When exposure compensation (A71) and Exposure bracketing (Tv) are set simultaneously,
the combined exposure compensation is applied.
• In White balance bracketing, only compensation for the color temperature (horizontal direction
from A (amber) to B (blue)) is performed. Compensation in the vertical direction from G (green) to
M (magenta) is not performed.
• This feature may not be used in combination with certain features. See “Features That Cannot Be
Used Simultaneously” (A80) for more information.
E37
Quick Menu
a Picture Control (COOLPIX Picture Control) (Changing the
Settings for Image Recording )
Rotate the mode dial to A, B, C or D M a (Quick menu dial) (A72)
Change the settings for image recording according to the shooting scene or your
preferences. Sharpness, contrast and saturation can be adjusted in detail.
Types of COOLPIX Picture Control
Description
Option
Reference Section
b
Standard
(default
setting)
Standard processing for balanced results. Recommended for
most situations.
c
Neutral
Minimal processing for natural results. Choose for pictures that
will later be extensively processed or retouched.
d
Vivid
Pictures are enhanced for a vivid, photoprint effect. Choose for
pictures that emphasize primary colors, such as blue, red, and
green.
e
Monochrome
Take monochrome photographs such as in black-and-white or
sepia.
f
Custom 1*
Change to the setting for Custom 1 in COOLPIX Custom Picture
Control.
g
Custom 2*
Change to the setting for Custom 2 in COOLPIX Custom Picture
Control.
* Only displayed when the setting customized in Custom Picture Control (E43) has been
registered.
The icon for the current setting other than Standard is displayed on the monitor
(A8).
B
COOLPIX Picture Control
• The COOLPIX Picture Control feature of the COOLPIX P7100 cannot be used with other makes of
cameras, Capture NX, Capture NX 2 and ViewNX 2 Picture Control feature.
• This feature may not be used in combination with certain features. See “Features That Cannot Be
Used Simultaneously” (A80) for more information.
E38
Quick Menu
Customizing Existing COOLPIX Picture Controls: Quick Adjust and
Manual Adjust
COOLPIX Picture Control can be customized using Quick adjust, which allows for
balanced adjustment of sharpness, contrast, saturation and other image editing
components, or manual adjust, which allows for detailed adjusting of the
components individually.
1
Use the multi selector to choose the type of
COOLPIX Picture Control and press the k
button.
• Items can also be chosen by rotating the main
command dial.
Standard
Neutral
Vivid
Monochrome
View grid
2
Standard
• Press the k button to set the value.
• When COOLPIX Picture Controls are modified from the
default settings, an asterisk (*) is displayed after the
options in the Picture Control Setting menu.
• To change the values to the default setting, select
Reset and press the k button.
Reset
Back
Quick adjust
Image sharpening
Contrast
Saturation
Reference Section
C
Press H or I to highlight the desired setting
(E40) and press J or K to choose a value.
View Grid of COOLPIX Picture Control
When the zoom control is rotated toward g (i) while the screen in
step 1 of the above procedure is displayed, the contrast and
saturation are displayed using a grid. The vertical axis indicates the
contrast level, and the horizontal axis indicates the saturation.
Rotate the zoom control toward g (i) again to return to the
previous screen.
The COOLPIX Picture Control grid displays the current and default
Back
Standard
settings in relation to the other COOLPIX Picture Controls.
• Rotate the multi selector to change to other COOLPIX Picture Controls.
• Press the k button to display the COOLPIX Picture Control Setting screen (step 2 above).
• For Monochrome, the grid is displayed for contrast only.
• The grid is also displayed when adjusting Contrast or Saturation with manual adjustment.
E39
Quick Menu
Types of Quick Adjust and Manual Adjust
Option
Description
Image sharpening
Control how much outlines are sharpened during shooting.
Choose A (auto) to adjust sharpening automatically, or choose
from seven levels of adjustment between 0 (no sharpening) and
6.
The higher the number, the sharper the image, and the lower
the number, the softer the image.
The default setting is 3 for Standard or Monochrome, 2 for
Neutral and 4 for Vivid.
Contrast
Control the contrast. Choose A (auto) to adjust the contrast
automatically according to the type of scene, or choose from
seven levels of adjustment between -3 and +3.
– makes it into an image with a softer appearance, and + gives it
a harder appearance. Choose lower values to prevent highlights
in portrait subjects from being “washed out” in direct sunlight,
higher values to preserve detail in misty landscapes and other
low-contrast subjects.
The default setting is 0.
Saturation 2
Control the vividness of colors. Choose A (auto) to adjust
saturation automatically according to the type of scene, or seven
levels of adjustment can be done by choosing from values
between -3 and +3.
Setting to the – side reduces the vividness, and setting to the +
side increases the vividness.
The default setting is 0.
Filter effects 3
Simulate the effect of color filters on monochrome photographs.
Choose from Off (the default setting), Y (yellow), O (orange), R
(red), and G (green).
Y, O, R:
Enhance contrast. Can be used to tone down the brightness of
the sky in landscape photographs. The contrast is strengthened
in the order Y ➝ O ➝ R.
G:
Soften skin tones. Suitable for portraits.
Reference Section
Quick adjust 1
Adjust the sharpness, contrast and saturation levels
automatically. Five levels of adjustment are available from -2 to
+2.
Choose from options between -2 and +2 to reduce or
emphasize the effect of the selected COOLPIX Picture Control.
The default setting is 0.
E40
Quick Menu
Option
Toning 3
1
2
3
Quick adjust is not available in Neutral, Monochrome, Custom 1 and Custom 2.
The values set manually are disabled if quick adjust is used after manual setting.
Not displayed for Monochrome.
Only displayed for Monochrome.
Reference Section
B
Description
Control the tint used in monochrome photographs from B&W
(black-and-white, the default setting), Sepia, and Cyanotype
(blue-tinted monochrome).
Pressing the rotary multi selector I when Sepia or Cyanotype
is selected enables you to choose from seven levels of saturation.
Press J or K to adjust the saturation.
Note on Image sharpening
The effects of Image sharpening cannot be previewed on the monitor during shooting. Check the
results in playback mode.
B
Note on Contrast
When Active D-Lighting (E56) is set to settings other than Off, the J mark is displayed for
Contrast and Contrast cannot be adjusted.
B
Contrast, Saturation and A (Auto)
• Results for contrast and saturation vary with the exposure, and the position and size of the subject
in the frame.
• The setting for the COOLPIX Picture Control which has A (auto) selected for either Contrast or
Saturation is displayed in green in the COOLPIX Picture Control grid.
C
Options that Can Be Adjusted in Custom 1 and Custom 2
The option of the original COOLPIX Picture Control can be adjusted if Custom 1 or Custom 2 is
selected.
E41
Quick Menu
a Movie Options (Changing the Type of Movie to Shoot)
Rotate the mode dial to D M a (Quick menu dial) (A72) M Movie options
You can choose the type of movie to shoot. The higher the image size and bit rate,
the higher the image quality, but the file size also becomes larger.
1
Press the multi selector J or K to choose the
movie type.
Movie options
• The maximum movie length for the selected movie
type is displayed.
• Items can also be chosen by rotating the main
command dial.
10m32s
HD 720p (1280×720)
Maximum movie length
2
After completing the settings, press the quick menu button or the k
button.
• The monitor display reverts to shooting screen.
Image Size
Option
Description
Reference Section
n HD 720p (1280×720)
(default setting)
Movies with an aspect ratio of 16:9 are recorded.
• Movie bitrate: 9 Mbps
m VGA (640×480)
Movies with an aspect ratio of 4:3 are recorded.
• Movie bitrate: 3 Mbps
W QVGA (320×240)
Movies with an aspect ratio of 4:3 are recorded.
• Movie bitrate: 640 kbps
• The movie bitrate is the volume of movie data recorded per second. As a
variable bitrate (VBR) system has been adopted, the movie recording rate varies
automatically according to the subject so that more data is recorded per
second for movies containing frequently moving subjects, thus increasing
movie file size.
• The frame rates are approximately 24 frames per second (fps) for HD 720p
(1280×720) and 30 frames per second (fps) for VGA (640×480) or QVGA
(320×240).
C
More Information
See “Maximum Movie Length” (A100) for more information.
E42
Shooting Menu (A, B, C or D Mode)
Custom Picture Control (COOLPIX Custom Picture Control)
Rotate the mode dial to A, B, C or D M d button M A, B, C or D tab (A13) M
Custom Picture Control
The picture editing options created by customizing COOLPIX Custom Picture
Controls can be registered up to two options. The registered options can be
displayed as Custom 1 and Custom 2 in COOLPIX Custom Picture Control.
Creating COOLPIX Custom Picture Controls
1
2
Custom Picture Control
Edit and save
Delete
Choose the original COOLPIX Picture Control (E39) to be edited, and
press the k button.
Press H or I to highlight the desired setting and press J or K to
choose a value (E39).
• The options are the same as those for adjusting the COOLPIX Picture Control.
• Press the k button to display the save as screen.
• To change the values to the default setting, select Reset and press the k button.
4
Choose the registration destination and press
the k button.
• The COOLPIX Custom Picture Control is registered.
• Custom 1 or Custom 2 can be selected from the
Picture Control and Custom Picture Control
selection screen after registration.
C
Reference Section
3
Use the multi selector to choose Edit and
save and press the k button.
Save as
Custom 1
Custom 2
Deleting COOLPIX Custom Picture Controls
Select Delete in step 1 of “Creating COOLPIX Custom Picture Controls” to delete a registered
Custom Picture Control.
E43
Shooting Menu (A, B, C or D Mode)
Metering
Rotate the mode dial to A, B, C, D or O M d button M A, B, C, D or O tab (A13)
M Metering
The process of measuring the brightness of the subject to determine the exposure
is known as “metering.”
Use this option to choose how the camera meters exposure.
Option
G
Matrix (default
setting)
Description
Use a wide area of the screen for metering.
This metering mode provides the appropriate exposure for a
variety of shooting conditions. Recommended for typical
shooting.
Reference Section
q Center-weighted
The camera meters the entire frame but assigns greatest weight
to the subject at the center of the frame. The classic metering for
portraits; it preserves background details while letting lighting
conditions at the center of the frame determine exposure. Can
be used with focus lock (A33) to meter off-center subjects.
r Spot
The camera meters the area shown by the circle in the center of
the frame. This can be used when the subject metering target is
lighter or darker than the background. Ensure that the subject is
within the area shown by the circle when shooting. Can be used
with focus lock (A33) to meter off-center subjects.
s Spot AF area
The camera meters the selected focus area to determine the
exposure. Available only when Face priority or Manual is
selected for AF area mode (E48).
B
Notes on Metering
• When the digital zoom is in effect, at magnifications of 1.2× to 1.8×, Metering is set to Centerweighted, and at magnifications of 2.0× to 4.0×, it is set to Spot. Note that when the digital zoom
is in effect, the metered area is not displayed on the monitor.
• This feature may not be used in combination with certain features. See “Features That Cannot Be
Used Simultaneously” (A80) for more information.
C
Metering in Low Noise Night Mode
Metering can be set even in low noise night mode (A50). This setting is stored in the camera’s
memory independently and is not applied to Metering in shooting modes A, B, C and D.
C
Metering Area
The active metering area is displayed when Center-weighted or Spot is selected for Metering
(A8).
E44
Shooting Menu (A, B, C or D Mode)
Continuous Shooting
Rotate the mode dial to A, B, C, D or O M d button M A, B, C, D or O tab (A13)
M Continuous
Change the settings for continuous shooting and BSS (Best Shot Selector).
Option
Description
One picture is shot each time the shutter-release button is
pressed.
V Continuous
Keep pressing the shutter-release button all the way, and up to
90 pictures are shot at a rate of about 1.2 frames per second
(fps) when image quality is set to Normal and image size is set
to M 3648×2736.
Y Continuous flash
Keep pressing the shutter-release button all the way, and
continuous shooting is performed using the built-in flash
(approximately three frames continuously at a rate of about 1.0
frame per second when image quality is set to Normal and
image size is set to M 3648×2736).
The camera charges the built-in flash once continuous shooting
ends. No shooting can be performed until the charging ends.
Because the ISO sensitivity is raised during shooting, pictures
may be slightly grainy.
D
BSS (Best Shot
Selector)
W Multi-shot 16
BSS is recommended for shooting under low lighting without
the flash, with the camera zoomed in, or in other situations in
which camera shake is likely to blur pictures.
Keep pressing the shutter-release button all the way, and up to
ten pictures are shot and the camera automatically selects and
saves only the sharpest picture in the series.
Reference Section
U Single (default
setting)
Each time the shutter-release button is
pressed all the way, the camera shoots
16 pictures at a rate of about 30 frames per
second and arranges them in a single
picture.
• The image quality is fixed at Normal and
the image size is fixed at D (2560 × 1920 pixels).
• The digital zoom is not available.
X Intvl timer shooting The camera shoots still pictures automatically at the specified
interval (E46).
The icon for the current setting other than Single is displayed on the monitor
(A8).
E45
Shooting Menu (A, B, C or D Mode)
B
Notes on Continuous Shooting
• Focus, exposure and white balance are fixed at the values determined with the first shot in each
series.
• The frame rate may become slower depending on the image quality, image size, memory card
type or shooting conditions.
• When ISO sensitivity (E30) is set to 3200 or Hi 1, the frame rate becomes slower.
• This feature may not be used in combination with certain features. See “Features That Cannot Be
Used Simultaneously” (A80) for more information.
• For details about using the built-in flash and the Speedlight (external flash unit) (available
separately), see “Features That Cannot Be Used Simultaneously” (A80).
• Do not raise or lower the built-in flash during continuous shooting. Shooting stops if the built-in
flash is raised or lowered.
B
Note on Continuous Flash
The continuous flash cannot be used when the built-in flash is lowered. Raise the built-in flash when
using the continuous flash to shoot.
B
Note on Best Shot Selector
BSS is suited for shooting stationary subjects. BSS may not produce the desired results if the subject
moves or the composition changes.
B
Note on Multi-shot 16
Reference Section
Smear (F3) visible in the monitor when shooting with Multi-shot 16 enabled will be recorded with
images. Avoiding bright objects such as the sun, reflections of the sun, and electric lights when
shooting with Multi-shot 16 enabled is recommended.
C
Continuous Shooting in Low Noise Night Mode
Continuous can be set to Single or Continuous even in low noise night mode (A50). This
setting is stored in the camera’s memory independently and is not applied to Continuous in
shooting modes A, B, C and D.
Interval Timer Shooting
Rotate the mode dial to A, B, C or D M d button M A, B, C or D tab (A13) M
Continuous
Choose from 30 s, 1 min, 5 min, or 10 min.
1
E46
Use the multi selector to select X Intvl timer
shooting for the Continuous setting, and
then press the k button.
Continuous
Single
Continuous
Continuous flash
BSS
Multi-shot 16
Intvl timer shooting
Shooting Menu (A, B, C or D Mode)
2
Choose the interval between each shot and
press the k button.
• The maximum amount of frames that can be taken
during interval timer shooting differs according to the
interval taken between each shot.
- 30 s: 600 images
- 1 min: 300 images
- 5 min: 60 images
- 10 min: 30 images
3
4
30 s
1 min
5 min
10 min
Press the d button.
• The camera returns to shooting screen.
Press the shutter-release button all the way to
shoot the first picture and start interval timer
shooting.
• The monitor is turned off and the power-on lamp
blinks between shots.
• The monitor reactivates automatically immediately
before the next picture is shot.
5
Intvl timer shooting
1/250
F5.6
600
Press the shutter-release button all the way again to finish shooting.
B
Reference Section
• Shooting finishes automatically if the internal memory or memory card becomes full,
or when the number of shot frames reaches the upper limit.
Notes on Interval Timer Shooting
• To prevent the camera from turning off unexpectedly during shooting, use a fully charged battery.
• To power the camera continuously for extended periods, use the AC Adapter EH-5b and the Power
Connector EP-5A (available separately) (E103). Do not, under any circumstances, use an AC
Adapter other than the EH-5b or a Power Connector other than the EP-5A. Failure to observe this
precaution could result in overheating or damage to the camera.
• Do not rotate the mode dial to a different setting while performing interval timer shooting.
C
More Information
See “File and Folder Names” (E99) for more information.
E47
Shooting Menu (A, B, C or D Mode)
AF Area Mode
Rotate the mode dial to A, B, C, D, u or O M d button M A, B, C, D, R or
O tab (A13) M AF area mode
You can set how the camera selects the focus area for autofocus.
• The AF area mode can also be selected by pressing the multi selector K (G)
(A60, E86).
Option
a Face priority
Reference Section
w
E48
Auto (default
setting)
Description
The camera automatically detects
and focuses on a face (see “Using
Face Detection” (A85) for more
information).
If the camera detects multiple
faces, the camera focuses on the
1/250 F5.6 1342
face closest to the camera.
When non-human subjects are
Focus area
photographed, or a subject with
which no face can be detected is
framed, AF area mode is set to Auto. The camera automatically
selects one or more of the nine focus areas containing the
subject closest to the camera.
• When the monitor is turned off, the focus area is fixed at the
Center (normal).
The camera automatically selects
one or more of the nine focus
areas containing the subject
closest to the camera.
Press the shutter-release button
halfway to activate the focus area.
When the shutter-release button is
1342
1/250 F5.6
pressed halfway, the focus area
Focus areas
selected by the camera is
displayed on the monitor (up to
nine areas).
• When the monitor is turned off, the focus area is fixed at the
Center (normal).
Shooting Menu (A, B, C or D Mode)
Option
x Manual
The camera focuses on the subject
at the center of the frame.
The focus area is always displayed
at the center of the frame.
Three sizes are available for the
focus area.
1/250
F5.6
Reference Section
p Center (spot),
y Center (normal),
u Center (wide)
Description
Choose manually the focus position
from 99 areas in the screen. This
option is suited to situations in
which the intended subject is
relatively still and not positioned at
the center of the frame.
Rotate the multi selector or press
H, I, J or K to select one of 99
Focus area
focus areas displayed on the
Selectable areas
monitor’s focus-area selection
screen, and shoot.
• To adjust the following settings, press the k button to
temporarily cancel focus area selection, and then adjust each
setting.
- Flash mode, focus mode or self-timer
To return to the focus area selection screen, press the k
button again.
• At an Image size setting (A77) of H 2736×2736, 81 focus
areas are available.
1342
Focus area
s Subject tracking
Subject tracking begins once you
select a subject to be focused on,
and the focus area will move and
follow the subject. See “Subject
Tracking Mode (Focusing on a
Moving Subject)” (E50).
End
1/250
B
F5.6
Notes on AF Area Mode
• When the digital zoom is in effect, the camera focuses on the subject at the center of the frame
regardless of the applied AF area mode option.
• In some rare cases of shooting subjects for which autofocus does not perform as expected (A33),
the subject may not be in focus.
• This feature may not be used in combination with certain features. See “Features That Cannot Be
Used Simultaneously” (A80) for more information.
E49
Shooting Menu (A, B, C or D Mode)
Subject Tracking Mode (Focusing on a Moving Subject)
Rotate the mode dial to A, B, C, D or O M d button M A, B, C, D or O tab (A13)
M AF area mode
Choose this mode to shoot moving subjects. Subject tracking begins once you
select a subject to be focused on, and the focus area will move and follow the
subject.
• This function can be used when the shooting mode is A, B, C, D, E, F, N
or O (low noise night).
1
Rotate the multi selector to select s Subject
tracking and press the k button.
• The camera enters subject tracking mode, and a white
border is displayed at the center of the frame.
2
Reference Section
Start
1/250
F5.6
End
1/250
F5.6
1/250
F5.6
Press the shutter-release button all the way to
take the picture.
• If the camera focuses on the focus area when the
shutter-release button is pressed halfway, the focus
area display lights in green and the focus is locked.
• If the shutter-release button is pressed halfway while
the focus area is not displayed, the camera focuses the
subject at the center of the frame.
E50
Face priority
Auto
Manual
Center (spot)
Center (normal)
Center (wide)
Subject tracking
Frame the subject at the center of the border,
and press the k button.
• The subject is registered.
• When the camera is unable to focus on the subject, the
border lights in red. Change the composition and try
again.
• Once the subject is registered, it is framed by a yellow
focus area display, and subject tracking begins.
• Press the k button to cancel the registration of the
subject.
• If the camera loses sight of the subject, the focus area
display disappears; register the subject again.
3
AF area mode
Shooting Menu (A, B, C or D Mode)
B
Notes on Subject Tracking
• The digital zoom is not available.
• Set the zoom position, flash mode, focus mode, or menu settings before registering a subject. If
any of these are changed after a subject is registered, the subject will be canceled.
• During certain conditions, such as when the subject is moving quickly, when there is a large
amount of camera shake, or when there are multiple subjects that look alike, the camera may not
be able to register or track a subject, or the camera may track a different subject. Additionally, the
subject may not be tracked properly depending on factors such as the subject’s size and
brightness.
• In some rare cases of shooting subjects for which autofocus does not perform as expected (A33),
the subject may not be in focus despite the fact that the focus area lights in green. If you cannot
focus, change the AF area mode setting to Manual, Center (spot), Center (normal) or Center
(wide), or try shooting with focus lock (A33) by switching the shooting mode to a mode such as
auto mode and refocusing on another subject at the same distance.
• In subject tracking, the monitor is not turned off even when the x button is pressed (A15).
• This feature may not be used in combination with certain features. See “Features That Cannot Be
Used Simultaneously” (A80) for more information.
Reference Section
E51
Shooting Menu (A, B, C or D Mode)
Autofocus Mode
Rotate the mode dial to A, B, C or D M d button M A, B, C or D tab (A13) M
Autofocus mode
Choose how the camera focuses.
Option
Description
Single AF
A (default
setting)
The camera focuses only when the shutter-release button is
pressed halfway.
B Full-time AF
The camera focuses continuously until the shutter-release button
is pressed down halfway. Use with moving subjects. A sound will
be heard while the camera focuses.
C
Autofocus Mode for Movie Recording
Autofocus mode for movie recording can be set with Autofocus mode (E69) in the movie menu.
Flash Exp. Comp.
Reference Section
Rotate the mode dial to A, B, C, D or O M d button M A, B, C, D or O tab (A13)
M Flash exp. comp.
Flash compensation is used to adjust the flash output, changing the brightness of
the subject relative to the background.
Option
Description
-0.3 to -2.0
The flash output is reduced from –0.3 to –2.0 EV, in increments of 1/3
EV, to prevent unwanted highlights or reflections.
0.0 (default
setting)
The flash output is not adjusted.
+0.3 to +2.0
The flash output is increased from +0.3 to +2.0 EV, in increments of 1/3
EV, to make the main subject of the frame appear brighter.
The icon for the current setting other than 0.0 is displayed on the monitor (A8).
C
Flash Exp. Comp. in Low Noise Night Mode
Flash exp. comp. can be set even in low noise night mode (A50). This setting is stored in the
camera’s memory independently and is not applied to Flash exp. comp. in shooting modes A, B,
C and D.
E52
Shooting Menu (A, B, C or D Mode)
Noise Reduction Filter
Rotate the mode dial to A, B, C or D M d button M A, B, C or D tab (A13) M Noise
reduction filter
Set the strength of the noise reduction function that is normally performed when
recording the picture.
• For noise at slow shutter speeds, set with Long exposure NR (E53).
Option
Description
Perform noise reduction at a level higher than the standard
strength.
e
High
M
Normal (default
Perform noise reduction at the standard strength.
setting)
l
Low
Perform noise reduction at a level lower than the standard
strength.
The icon for the current setting other than Normal is displayed on the monitor (A8).
Long Exposure NR
At slow shutter speeds, pictures may be affected by “noise” in the form of
randomly-spaced, brightly-colored dots concentrated in dark parts of the image.
Reduce noise at slow shutter speeds. Enabling long exposure NR increases the
time needed to record pictures after they are shot.
Option
Description
Auto (default
a setting)
Noise reduction is performed at slow shutter speeds that are
likely to result in pictures affected by noise.
m
Noise reduction is applied to pictures shot at shutter speeds of
1/4 second or slower. Switching this to On is recommended
when shooting at slow shutter speeds.
On
Reference Section
Rotate the mode dial to A, B, C or D M d button M A, B, C or D tab (A13) M
Long exposure NR
When long exposure NR is performed, the j icon is displayed on the monitor (A8).
B
Note on Long Exposure NR
This feature may not be used in combination with certain features. See “Features That Cannot Be
Used Simultaneously” (A80) for more information.
E53
Shooting Menu (A, B, C or D Mode)
Distortion Control
Rotate the mode dial to A, B, C or D M d button M A, B, C or D tab (A13) M
Distortion control
Choose whether to correct the peripheral distortion that occurs due to the
intrinsic characteristics of lenses. Enabling distortion control reduces the size of the
frame, as compared to when distortion control is not enabled.
When On is selected, distortion is corrected.
• The default setting is Off.
When On is selected, an icon for this setting is displayed on the monitor (A8).
B
Note on Distortion Control
This feature may not be used in combination with certain features. See “Features That Cannot Be
Used Simultaneously” (A80) for more information.
Wide-angle Converter
Reference Section
Rotate the mode dial to A, B, C or D M d button M A, B, C or D tab (A13) M
Wide-angle converter
Set when the Wide-angle Converter WC-E75A (0.75×) (available separately) is
mounted. The Adapter Ring UR-E22 (available separately) is also required for
mounting.
Option
Description
X
On
Set when using the Wide-angle Converter WC-E75A. The angle of
view when the WC-E75A is mounted is equivalent to about
21 mm in 35mm [135] format (when Distortion control is set to
Off). The zoom lens is fixed at the wide-angle end.
The digital zoom is not available.
k
None (default
setting)
Use when no converter lens is attached (be sure to remove the
lens adapter ring and attach the lens ring).
When On is selected, an icon for this setting is displayed on the monitor (A8).
E54
Shooting Menu (A, B, C or D Mode)
B
Notes on the Wide-angle Converter for Shooting
• Set Wide-angle converter to On before shooting. Set Wide-angle converter to None when
no converter lens is attached.
• The built-in flash is set to W (off) when Wide-angle converter is set to On. Use flash units
(E101) (available separately) to shoot with the flash.
• Using the flash units (available separately) may darken the peripheral area of the picture. Check the
picture on the monitor after shooting. A wide-flash adapter is recommended when shooting with
the Speedlight SB-600, SB-700, SB-800 or SB-900.
• AF-assist illuminator cannot be used when Wide-angle converter is set to On.
• This feature may not be used in combination with certain features. See “Features That Cannot Be
Used Simultaneously” (A80) for more information.
C
Installing and Removing the Lens Ring
Reference Section
• Before attaching the wide-angle converter,
remove the lens ring. Before installing or
removing the lens ring, be sure to turn off
the camera. While pressing the lens ring
release button, rotate the lens ring
clockwise and remove it.
• To attach the lens ring to the camera, align
Lens ring release button
the lens ring mounting index (white dot)
with the lens ring release button, and then
rotate the lens ring counterclockwise.
• When not using the wide-angle converter, be sure to attach the lens ring onto the camera.
• For more information on attaching the wide-angle converter, see the instruction manual provided
with the wide-angle converter.
Flash Control
Rotate the mode dial to A, B, C or D M d button M A, B, C or D tab (A13) M
Flash control
You can set the built-in flash to off even when you are not using a Speedlight
(external flash unit) (E101) attached to the camera’s accessory shoe.
Option
Description
Auto (default
a
setting)
When a flash unit is mounted, the flash unit fires. When a flash
unit is not used, the built-in flash fires.
k
The built-in flash is disabled.
B
Built-in off
Note on Flash Control
This feature may not be used in combination with certain features. See “Features That Cannot Be
Used Simultaneously” (A80) for more information.
E55
Shooting Menu (A, B, C or D Mode)
Active D-Lighting
Rotate the mode dial to A, B, C or D M d button M A, B, C or D tab (A13) M
Active D-Lighting
“Active D-Lighting” preserves details in highlights and shadows, creating
photographs with natural contrast. The image taken reproduces the contrast
effect that is seen with the naked eye. This is particularly effective for shooting
scenes with high contrast, such as brightly lit outdoor scenery from a dark room or
shaded subjects at a sunny seaside.
Option
Description
a
b
c
High
Normal
Low
Set the level of the Active D-Lighting effect that is applied during
shooting.
k
Off (default
setting)
Active D-Lighting is not applied.
The icon for the current setting other than Off is displayed on the monitor (A8).
Reference Section
B
Active D-Lighting
• Additional time is required to record images when shooting using Active D-Lighting.
• The exposure is reduced in comparison to shooting with Active D-Lighting set to Off. To ensure
that the gradation is appropriate, adjustments of the highlighted areas, shadow areas and midtones are made before recording.
• This feature may not be used in combination with certain features. See “Features That Cannot Be
Used Simultaneously” (A80) for more information.
B
Active D-Lighting Versus D-Lighting
The Active D-Lighting option in the shooting menu reduces exposure before shooting to optimize
the dynamic range. The D-Lighting (E11) option in the playback menu optimizes dynamic range
in pictures taken.
E56
Shooting Menu (A, B, C or D Mode)
Zoom Memory
Rotate the mode dial to A, B, C or D M d button M A, B, C or D tab (A13) M
Zoom memory
When the zoom control is operated while pressing the w1 button, the camera
changes in steps to the focal length (equivalent to 35mm [135] format of angle of
view) of the zoom lens that is set in advance in Zoom memory. The following
settings are available: 28 mm, 35 mm, 50 mm, 85 mm, 105 mm, 135 mm and
200 mm.
• Choose the focal length with the multi selector, and then press the k button to
set the check box to on w or off.
• Multiple focal lengths can be chosen.
• The default setting is on w for all the check boxes.
• To finish the setting, press the multi selector J.
Reference Section
B
Notes on Zoom Operation
• Operate the zoom control while pressing the w1 button to change the zoom position to focal
length for which the zoom memory is set to on.
The changed focal length is the closest to that before the operation. To change the zoom position
to the next focal length level, release the zoom control and then operate it again.
• Release your finger from the w1 button when using the digital zoom.
E57
Specialized Menu for E, F or N
The following describes how to use Save user settings and Reset user settings.
See “E, F and N (User Setting Modes)” (A57) for more information other
than Save user settings and Reset user settings.
Save User Settings
The frequently used settings for shooting can be changed and saved in E, F
and N.
1
Rotate the mode dial to E, F or N.
2
Change to a frequently used combination of shooting settings.
Reference Section
• Press the d button to display the menu and switch between tabs with the multi
selector (A13).
– E, F, N tabs: Display the specialized menus for E, F and N (A57).
– A, B, C, D tabs: Display the shooting menus (A54).
• Display the quick menu by pressing the quick menu button (A72).
3
4
After changing the settings, choose Save
user settings in the specialized menu for E,
F or N, and press the k button.
Choose Yes and press the k button.
• The current settings are saved.
• Rotate the zoom control toward g (i) to display the
settings (E59). Rotate toward g (i) again to return to
the save user settings screen.
User settings
Save user settings
Reset user settings
Shooting mode
Focal length (35mm equiv.)
Photo info
Virtual horizon display
Initial monitor display
Save user settings
Save current settings?
Yes
No
Info
E58
Specialized Menu for E, F or N
B
Clock battery
If the internal clock battery (A27) is exhausted, the settings saved in E, F or N will be reset.
Writing down any important setting is recommended.
C
Confirmation Screen of User Settings
C
12
13
Reference Section
Rotate the zoom control toward g (i) to display the settings on the screen in step 4 (E58).
1 Shooting mode
1 2 3 4 5 6
2 Shutter speed
1/250 F5.6
3 Aperture value
7
8
4 Flash mode
5 Flash exp. comp.
9
10
6 Flash control
11
7 AF area mode, autofocus mode, AF assist
8 Metering, continuous shooting mode, active
14 15 16 17 18
D-Lighting
9 Noise reduction filter, long exposure NR
10 Zoom memory
11 Focus mode, focal length (35mm equiv.), distortion
control, wide-angle converter
12 Photo info, virtual horizon display
13 Initial monitor display
14 Image quality, image size
15 ISO sensitivity
16 White balance
17 Auto bracketing
18 Picture Control
Resetting for E, F and N
If Reset user settings is selected in specialized menu for E, F or N, the settings that are saved
in the user settings are reset as follows:
• Specialized menus for E, F and N: Shooting mode: A Programmed auto, Focal length
(35mm equiv.): 28 mm, Photo info: information hidden, Virtual horizon display: Circle,
Initial monitor display: Show info, Flash mode: U Auto, Focus: A Autofocus, AF area
mode: w Auto, AF assist: Auto
• Shooting menu, quick menu: Same as the default setting for each item
E59
The Playback Menu
For more information about image editing function; Quick retouch, D-Lighting,
Skin softening, Filter effects, Small picture, Black border, Straighten and
NRW (RAW) processing, see “Editing Still Images” (E9).
a Print Order (Creating a DPOF Print Order)
Press the d button M c tab (A13) M a Print order
If you choose to use one of the following methods to print pictures that are stored
on a memory card, the pictures to print and the number of copies can be set in
advance on the memory card.
• Printing with a DPOF-compatible (F16) printer that is equipped with a card
slot.
• Ordering the prints from a digital photo lab that has a DPOF service.
• Printing by connecting the camera to a PictBridge-compatible (F16) printer
(E22). (When the memory card is removed from the camera, the print order
can also be performed for the pictures stored on the internal memory.)
1
Reference Section
Use the multi selector to choose Select
images and press the k button.
• When list by date mode (A88) is selected, the menu
shown on the right is not displayed.
Proceed to the step 2.
2
Choose the pictures (up to a maximum of 99)
and number of copies (up to nine per picture).
Print order
Select images
Delete print set
Print selection
1
1
3
• Rotate the multi selector or press J or K to choose the
pictures, and press H or I to set the number of copies
for each.
• Pictures can also be chosen by rotating the main
Back
command dial.
• Pictures selected for printing can be recognized by the
check mark icon and the numeral indicating the number of copies to be printed. If no
copies have been specified for images, the selection is canceled.
• Rotate the zoom control toward g (i) to switch to full frame playback mode, or f
(h) to switch to 12 thumbnails display.
• Press the k button when setting is complete.
E60
The Playback Menu
3
Choose whether or not to also print shooting
date and shooting information.
• Choose Date and press the k button to print the
shooting date on all pictures in the print order.
• Choose Info and press the k button to print shooting
information (shutter speed and aperture value) on all
pictures in the print order.
• Choose Done and press the k button to complete the
print order.
Pictures selected for printing are recognized by the w
icon displayed in playback mode.
Print order
Done
Date
Info
15/11/2011 15:30
0004.JPG
4 132
Reference Section
B
Notes on Printing Shooting Date and Shooting Information
When the Date and Info options are enabled in the print order menu, shooting date and shooting
information are printed on pictures when a DPOF-compatible (F16) printer which supports
printing of shooting date and shooting information is used.
• Shooting information cannot be printed when the camera is connected directly to a printer, via
the included USB cable, for DPOF printing (E27).
• Date and Info are reset each time the Print order menu is displayed.
• The date and time printed on the picture is the date and time
recorded on the camera when the picture was taken. The date and
time printed using this option are not affected if the camera’s
Time zone and date setting is changed from the setup menu
after the pictures are taken.
15/11/2011
E61
The Playback Menu
B
Notes on Print Order
• When setting a print order in list by date mode and pictures other
than those on the chosen date are already set for printing, the
screen shown on the right is displayed.
- Select Yes to add the print order setting to the existing print
order.
- Select No to remove the existing print order and retain the
print order setting.
Additionally, if there are more than 99 pictures as a result of
adding the current print order settings, the screen shown on the
right will be displayed.
- Select Yes to remove the existing print order and retain the
print order setting.
- Select Cancel to retain the existing print order and remove the
print order setting.
Print order
Save print marking for other
dates?
Yes
No
Print order
Too many images selected.
Remove print marking for
other dates?
Yes
Cancel
• NRW (RAW) pictures cannot be set for printing. Create a JPEG picture using NRW (RAW)
processing (E17), and then set the JPEG picture for printing.
C
Deleting All Print Orders
Reference Section
In step 1 of the print order procedure (E60), choose Delete print order and press the k button
to delete the print orders for all pictures.
C
Print Date
The shooting date and time can be imprinted in pictures at the time of shooting by using Print
date (E75) in the setup menu. This information can be printed even from printers that do not
support printing of the date and time. Only the date and time of print date on the pictures are
printed, even if Print order is enabled with the date selected in the print order screen.
C
More Information
See “Printing Images of Size 1:1” (A79) for more information.
E62
The Playback Menu
b Slide Show
Press the d button M c tab (A13) M b Slide show
View pictures stored in the internal memory or on a memory card in an automatic
slide show.
1
Use the multi selector to choose Start and
press the k button.
Slide show
Pause
• To change the interval between pictures, choose
Frame intvl, select the desired interval time, and press
Start
the k button before choosing Start.
Frame intvl
Loop
• To repeat the slide show automatically, enable Loop
and press the k button before choosing Start. The
check mark (w) is added to the loop option when enabled.
2
3s
The slide show begins.
• Press the multi selector K to display the next picture, or
J to display the previous picture. Press and hold K to
fast forward, or J to rewind.
• To exit partway or pause, press the k button.
Choose End or Restart.
• When exiting or pausing the slide show, the screen
shown on the right is displayed. Choose G and press
the k button to return to the playback menu. Choose
F to play the slide show again.
B
Reference Section
3
Notes on Slide Shows
• Only the first frame of movies (A102) included in slide shows is displayed.
• Slide shows play for a maximum of 30 minutes, even when Loop is selected (E82).
E63
The Playback Menu
c Delete
Press the d button M c tab (A13) M c Delete
Delete a picture. Multiple pictures can also be deleted.
Option
Description
Erase selected
images
In the image selection screen, choose the pictures for deletion. See “The
Image Selection Screen” (E65) for more information.
• When images saved with an Image quality (A75) setting of NRW
(RAW) + Fine, NRW (RAW) + Normal or NRW (RAW) + Basic are
chosen, the NRW (RAW) and JPEG images are deleted at the same
time.
Erase all images
Delete all pictures.
Erase selected
NRW images
Only NRW (RAW) images are displayed in the picture selection screen.
Select and delete images.
• For pictures where NRW (RAW) and JPEG images are recorded at the
same time, only the NRW (RAW) image is deleted.
Erase selected
JPEG images
Only JPEG images are displayed in the image selection screen. Select and
delete pictures.
• For pictures where NRW (RAW) and JPEG images are recorded at the
same time, only the JPEG image is deleted.
Reference Section
B
Notes on Deletion
• Once deleted, pictures cannot be recovered. Transfer important images to a computer before
deletion.
• Pictures marked with the s icon are protected and cannot be deleted (E66).
• I is displayed in the image selection screen for pictures where NRW (RAW) and JPEG images are
recorded at the same time.
E64
The Playback Menu
The Image Selection Screen
The image selection screen is displayed in the following menus.
Only one image can be selected for some menu items, while for other menu items,
multiple images can be selected.
Functions for which only one image can be Functions for which multiple images can be
selected
selected
• Playback menu:
Quick retouch* (E11),
D-Lighting* (E11),
Skin softening* (E12),
Filter effects* (E13),
Rotate image* (E66),
Small picture* (E14),
Voice memo* (E67),
Black border* (E15),
Straighten* (E16),
NRW (RAW) processing (E17)
• Setup menu:
Select an image in Welcome screen
(E70)
• Playback menu:
Select images in Print order (E60),
Erase selected images in Delete (E64),
Protect (E66),
Hide image (E66),
Selected images in Copy (E68)
* These menus are displayed if menu items are selected when the playback menu has been
displayed from a mode other than playback mode (A13).
1
Rotate the multi selector, or press J or K to
choose the desired image.
Erase selected images
• Images can also be chosen by rotating the main
command dial.
• Rotate the zoom control toward g (i) to switch to fullframe playback mode, or f (h) to switch to 12
Back
thumbnails display.
• For functions for which only one image is selected, proceed to step 3.
2
Press H or I to select or deselect (or the
number of copies).
Reference Section
Follow the procedure described below to select images.
ON/OFF
Erase selected images
• When an image is selected, a check mark (y) is
displayed with the image. Repeat steps 1 and 2 to
select additional images.
Back
3
ON/OFF
Press the k button to apply the image selection.
• With selections such as Erase selected images, the confirmation dialog is displayed.
Follow the instructions on the screen.
E65
The Playback Menu
d Protect
Press the d button M c tab (A13) M d Protect
Protect selected pictures from accidental deletion.
In the picture selection screen, choose a picture and set or cancel protection. See
“The Image Selection Screen” (E65) for more information.
Note, however, that formatting the camera’s internal memory or the memory card
permanently erases the protected files (E83).
Protected pictures are recognized by the s icon in playback mode (A10).
f Rotate Image
Press the d button M c tab (A13) M f Rotate image
Reference Section
Change the orientation of pictures played back in the camera’s monitor after
shooting. Still pictures can be rotated 90° clockwise or counterclockwise.
Pictures that were recorded in the “tall” orientation can be rotated up to 180° in
either direction.
Select a picture in the picture selection screen (E65) to display the rotate image
screen. Rotate the multi selector, or press J or K to rotate the picture 90°.
Press the k button to set the orientation displayed and save the orientation data
with the picture.
i Hide Image
Press the d button M c tab (A13) M i Hide image
Hide pictures so that they cannot be played back on the camera monitor.
In the picture selection screen, choose the pictures and set or cancel the hide
setting. See “The Image Selection Screen” (E65) for more information.
Hidden pictures cannot be deleted using the Delete option. Note, however, that
formatting the internal memory or memory card (E83) permanently erases the
hidden pictures.
E66
The Playback Menu
E Voice Memo
Press the d button M c tab (A13) M E Voice memo
Use the camera’s microphone to record voice memos for pictures.
• The recording screen is displayed for a picture without voice memo, while the voice memo
playback screen is displayed for a picture with voice memo (a picture marked with p in
full-frame playback mode).
Recording Voice Memos
• Recording ends after about 20 seconds or when the k
button is released.
• Do not touch the microphone during recording.
• During recording, o and p blink on the monitor.
• When recording ends, the voice memo playback screen is
displayed.
17s
Playing Voice Memos
Pictures for which voice memos have been recorded are
indicated by p in full-frame playback mode.
12s
Deleting Voice Memos
Press the l button on the voice memo playback screen.
Press the multi selector H or I to select Yes and press
the k button to delete only the voice memo.
B
Reference Section
• Press the k button to play back a voice memo. To end
playback, press the k button again.
• Rotate the zoom control toward g or f during playback to
adjust playback volume.
• Press the multi selector J before or after playing a voice
memo to return to the playback menu. Press the d
button to exit the playback menu.
File will be deleted. OK?
Yes
No
Notes on Voice Memos
• When a picture with a voice memo attached is deleted, both the
picture and its voice memo are deleted.
• Voice memos cannot be recorded for a picture that already has a voice memo attached on it. The
current voice memo must be deleted before a new voice memo can be recorded.
• COOLPIX P7100 is not able to record a voice memo for a picture taken with cameras other than
COOLPIX P7100.
• A voice memo of the image with the Protect setting (E66) cannot be deleted.
C
More Information
See “File and Folder Names” (E99) for more information.
E67
The Playback Menu
h Copy (Copy Between Internal Memory and Memory
Card)
Press the d button M c tab (A13) M h Copy
Copy pictures between the internal memory and a memory card.
1
Use the multi selector to select an option
from the copy screen and press the k button.
Copy
• q: Copy pictures from the internal memory to
the memory card.
• r: Copy pictures from the memory card to the
internal memory.
2
Select a copy option and press the k button.
• Selected images: In the picture selection screen
(E65), choose the pictures for
copying.
• All images: Copy all pictures.
Reference Section
B
Camera to card
Selected images
All images
Notes on Copying Pictures
• JPEG-, NRW-, MOV-, and WAV-format files can be copied. Files recorded in any other format cannot
be copied.
• Voice memo (E67) attached to pictures and Protect setting (E66) are also copied with the
pictures.
• When images saved with an Image quality (A75) setting of NRW (RAW) + Fine, NRW (RAW)
+ Normal or NRW (RAW) + Basic are chosen, the NRW (RAW) and JPEG images are copied at the
same time.
• Pictures recorded with another make or model of camera or that have been modified on a
computer cannot be copied.
• The Print order (E60) settings are not copied.
• Pictures with Hide image (E66) settings cannot be copied.
C
Message: “Memory contains no images.”
If there are no pictures stored on the memory card when playback mode is selected, the message,
Memory contains no images., is displayed. Press the d button to display the copy option screen,
and copy the pictures stored in the camera’s internal memory to the memory card.
C
More Information
See “File and Folder Names” (E99) for more information.
E68
The Movie Menu
Autofocus Mode
Rotate the mode dial to D M d button M D (Movie) tab (A13) M Autofocus mode
Choose how the camera focuses when recording movies.
Option
Description
Lock on the focus when the shutter-release button is pressed
Single AF
A
halfway. Select this option when the distance between the camera
(default setting)
and the subject remains fairly consistent.
B Full-time AF
The camera focuses continuously during movie recording.
Suitable for shooting when the distance between the camera and
subject changes. The operation sound when the camera focuses
may be recorded. Setting to Single AF is recommended if the
sound is noticeable.
Wind Noise Reduction
Option
Description
The noise of wind blowing on the camera’s built-in microphone is
minimized during recording. This setting is suitable for recording
in strong winds. During playback, not only wind noise, but other
sounds may also become difficult to hear.
Y
On
k
Off
Wind noise is not reduced.
(default setting)
Reference Section
Rotate the mode dial to D M d button M D (Movie) tab (A13) M Wind noise
reduction
When On is selected, an icon for this setting is displayed on the monitor (A8).
B
Note on Wind Noise Reduction
When the external microphone (E84) is used for shooting, wind noise reduction is not available.
E69
The Setup Menu
Welcome Screen
Press the d button M z tab (A13) M Welcome screen
Choose whether or not to display the welcome screen on the monitor when the
camera is turned on.
Option
None
(default setting)
COOLPIX
Select an image
Reference Section
E70
Description
Display the shooting or playback screen without displaying the
welcome screen.
Display the welcome screen before displaying the shooting or
playback screen.
Select a picture taken to display as the welcome screen. Display the
image selection screen, choose an image (E65), and press the k
button to register it.
• Because the selected image is stored in the camera, the image
appears in the welcome screen even if the original image is deleted.
• NRW (RAW) images (A75), pictures shot with an Image size
(A77) of I 3648×2432, z 3584×2016, or H 2736×2736, or
pictures reduced to 320×240 or smaller using small picture editing
(E14) or crop (E19) cannot be selected.
The Setup Menu
Time Zone and Date
Press the d button M z tab (A13) M Time zone and date
Option
Date and time
Date format
Time zone
Reference Section
Description
Set the camera clock to the current date and time.
Use the multi selector to set the date
Date and time
and time.
• Choose an item: Press K or J
D
M
Y
15
11
2011
(selected in the following order: D
(day) ➝ M (month) ➝ Y (year) ➝
15
10
hour ➝ minute).
• Set the contents: Press H or I. Date
Edit
and time can also be set by rotating
the main command dial.
• Finish setting: Choose minute and press the k button or K.
Choose the order in which the day, month, and year are displayed
(Year/Month/Day, Month/Day/Year or Day/Month/Year).
w Home time zone can be specified and daylight saving can be
enabled or disabled.
When x travel destination is registered, the time difference (E73)
from the w home time zone is automatically calculated and the local
date and time are recorded. Useful when traveling.
E71
The Setup Menu
Setting the Travel Destination Time Zone
1
Use the multi selector to choose Time zone
and press the k button.
• The Time zone screen is displayed.
Time zone and date
15/11/2011 15:30
London, Casablanca
Date and time
Date format
Time zone
2
Choose x Travel destination and press the
k button.
• The date and time displayed on the monitor change
according to the region currently selected.
3
Press K.
Time zone
Tokyo, Seoul
15/11/2011 0:30
Home time zone
Travel destination
Time zone
• The time zone selection screen is displayed.
Tokyo, Seoul
Reference Section
16/11/2011 0:30
Home time zone
Travel destination
4
Press J or K to choose the travel destination
(Time zone).
• The time difference between home and the travel
destination is displayed.
• When using the camera in an area where daylight saving
time is in effect, turn on the daylight saving setting with
H. When set to on, the W icon is displayed on the top
of the monitor and the clock advances by one hour. To
turn off, press I.
• Press the k button to register the travel destination
time zone.
• While the travel destination time zone is selected, the
Z icon is displayed on the monitor when the camera is
in shooting mode.
C
Time difference
10:30
-5:00
EST:
New York
Toronto
Lima
Back
Time zone
EST:New York
Toronto, Lima
15/11/2011 10:30
Home time zone
Travel destination
w Home Time Zone
• To switch to the home time zone, choose w Home time zone in step 2 and press the k button.
• To change the home time zone, choose w Home time zone in step 2 and perform the same
procedure as for x Travel destination to set the home time zone.
E72
The Setup Menu
C
Time Zones
The camera supports the time zones listed below.
For time differences not listed below, set the camera clock using Time zone and date.
UTC +/-
Location
UTC +/-
Location
-11
Midway, Samoa
+1
Madrid, Paris, Berlin
-10
Hawaii, Tahiti
+2
Athens, Helsinki, Ankara
-9
Alaska, Anchorage
+3
Moscow, Nairobi, Riyadh,
Kuwait, Manama
-8
PST (PDT): Los Angeles,
Seattle, Vancouver
+4
Abu Dhabi, Dubai
-7
MST (MDT): Denver, Phoenix
+5
Islamabad, Karachi
-6
CST (CDT): Chicago,
Houston, Mexico City
+5.5
-5
EST (EDT): New York,
Toronto, Lima
+6
Caracas
+7
Bangkok, Jakarta
+8
Beijing, Hong Kong,
Singapore
-4.5
New Delhi
Colombo, Dhaka
Manaus
-3
Buenos Aires, Sao Paulo
+9
Tokyo, Seoul
-2
Fernando de Noronha
+10
Sydney, Guam
-1
Azores
+11
New Caledonia
±0
London, Casablanca
+12
Auckland, Fiji
Reference Section
-4
E73
The Setup Menu
Monitor Settings
Press the d button M z tab (A13) M Monitor settings
Option
Description
Image review
On (default setting): Picture is displayed on the monitor immediately
after shooting and the monitor display returns to shooting screen.
Off: Picture is not displayed after shooting.
Zoom in on active focus point: Picture is displayed on the monitor
immediately after shooting and the monitor display returns to the
shooting screen. An enlarged image of the focused section is
displayed in the area where focusing is performed.
Tone level information: Tone level information (A15) is
displayed on the monitor immediately after shooting.
Brightness
Choose from five settings to select the monitor brightness. The
default setting is 3.
Reference Section
Photo info
Choose the display options that are displayed on the monitor during
shooting. Separate display options (A15) can be selected for when
the monitor display (A8) is set to Show info and when it is set to
Hide info. In the default setting, all options are hidden.
X Virtual horizon: Display the virtual horizon for checking whether
the camera is horizontal. When the camera is horizontal or vertical,
the mark on the virtual horizon display turns green.
Y View/hide histograms: Display a graph that shows the
brightness distribution in the picture (A8).
Z View/hide framing grid: Display a boxed guide for framing.
• To select show or hide, choose an option with the multi selector,
and then press the k button to turn the check box on w or off.
• After finishing the setting, choose Confirm and press the k
button.
Virtual horizon
display
B
Set the virtual horizon indicator to either Circle (default setting) or
Bars (A8).
Notes on Monitor Display Settings
• Only the framing grid is displayed in movie mode.
• In shooting modes E, F and N, Photo info in the setup menu settings cannot be set. Select
the E, F or N tab and set Photo info in the specialized menus for E, F and N (A13,
58).
E74
The Setup Menu
Print Date (Imprinting Date and Time on Pictures)
Press the d button M z tab (A13) M Print date
The shooting date and time can be imprinted on
pictures at the time of shooting. This information can be
printed even from printers that do not support printing
of the date and time (E61).
15/11/2011
Option
Description
f
Date
The date is imprinted on pictures.
S
Date and time
The date and time are imprinted on pictures.
k Off (default setting)
The date and time are not imprinted on pictures.
The icon for the current setting other than Off is displayed on the monitor (A8).
Reference Section
B
Notes on Print Date
• Imprinted dates cannot be deleted from the image, nor can dates be imprinted after the picture
has been taken.
• Dates cannot be imprinted in the following situations.
- When the scene mode is set to Sports, Museum, Backlighting with HDR set to On,
Panorama assist, or Pet portrait with Continuous
- During movie recording
• This feature may not be used in combination with certain features. See “Features That Cannot Be
Used Simultaneously” (A80) for more information.
• Dates imprinted with an Image size (A77) setting of f 640×480 may be difficult to read. Set
the image size to J 1024×768 or higher.
• The date is recorded using the format selected in the setup menu’s Time zone and date option
(A26, E71).
C
Print date and Print order
When printing from DPOF-compatible printers which support printing of shooting date and
shooting information, the date and information can be printed on pictures without the date and
time being imprinted on them with Print date, using options in the Print order menu (E60).
E75
The Setup Menu
Self-timer: After Release
Press the d button M z tab (A13) M Self-timer: after release
Set whether or not to cancel the self-timer mode (A64), or ten seconds or two
seconds remote mode (E105), after shooting pictures.
Option
Description
Exit self-timer mode
(default setting)
Cancel the self-timer mode after shooting pictures.
• The setting is not canceled in the quick-response remote or
smile timer mode (A65).
Stay in self-timer mode
Enable shooting continuously without canceling the setting,
after shooting pictures.
• The setting applied in shooting modes A (auto), A, B, C,
D, O (low noise night) or u (special effects) is not
cancelled even after the camera is turned off.
Vibration Reduction
Press the d button M z tab (A13) M Vibration reduction
Reference Section
Option
g
Description
Correct camera shake that commonly occurs when shooting still pictures
or movies at the telephoto zoom position or slow shutter speed.
The camera automatically detects the panning direction and only
On
(default setting) corrects for vibration caused by camera shake.
When the camera is panned horizontally, for example, vibration
reduction only reduces vertical shake. If the camera is panned
vertically, vibration reduction only compensates for horizontal shake.
k Off
Vibration Reduction is not enabled.
• When using a tripod to stabilize the camera, set vibration reduction to Off.
When On is selected, an icon for this setting is displayed on the monitor (A8).
B
Notes on Vibration Reduction
• After the power is turned on or the camera enters shooting mode from playback mode, wait until
the display stabilizes before shooting.
• Due to the characteristics of the vibration reduction function, images displayed on the monitor
immediately after shooting may appear blurry.
• Vibration reduction may be unable to completely eliminate the effects of camera shake in some
situations.
E76
The Setup Menu
Motion Detection
Press the d button M z tab (A13) M Motion detection
Enable motion detection to reduce the effects of camera shake and subject
movement when shooting still pictures.
Option
Description
If the camera detects the movement of the subject or camera
shake, the ISO sensitivity is raised and the shutter speed is
increased to reduce their effects.
However, motion detection does not function in the following
situations.
• When the fill flash fires
• In the following scene modes: Sports, Night portrait, Dusk/
dawn, Night landscape, Museum, Fireworks show,
Backlighting and Pet portrait
• When shooting mode is A, B, C, D, E, F, N, O (low
noise night) or u (special effects)
U
Auto
k
Off
Motion detection is not enabled.
(default setting)
B
Reference Section
When Auto is selected, an icon for this setting is displayed on the monitor (A8).
The motion detection icon lights in green when the camera detects any vibration
and increases the shutter speed.
Notes on Motion Detection
• Motion detection may be unable to completely reduce effects of camera shake and subject
movement in some situations.
• Motion detection may not function if the subject exhibits significant movement or is too dark.
• The pictures taken may become grainy.
• This feature may not be used in combination with certain features. See “Features That Cannot Be
Used Simultaneously” (A80) for more information.
E77
The Setup Menu
AF Assist
Press the d button M z tab (A13) M AF assist
Enable or disable the AF-assist illuminator that assists the autofocus when the
lighting is dim.
Option
Description
Auto (default setting)
AF-assist illuminator lights automatically if the lighting is dim.
The illuminator has a range of about 8.0 m (26 ft) at the
maximum wide-angle position and about 7.0 m (22 ft) at the
maximum telephoto position.
• For some focus areas and scene modes such as Museum
(A43), Pet portrait (A45), AF-assist illuminator does not
turn on even if Auto is set.
Off
AF-assist illuminator does not light. The camera may be unable
to focus if lighting is dim.
B
Note on the AF-assist Illuminator
In shooting modes E, F and N, AF assist in the setup menu settings cannot be set.
Select the E, F or N tab and set AF assist in the specialized menus for E, F and N (A13,
58).
Reference Section
Red-eye Reduction
Press the d button M z tab (A13) M Red-eye reduction
Choose the red-eye reduction method when the flash mode (A61) is V (auto
with red-eye reduction).
Option
Description
Pre-flash on
(default setting)
The flash repeatedly fires pre-flashes at low intensity before the
main flash to reduce the red-eye effect, and it then performs the
red-eye reduction process using picture compensation. Note
that there is a slight lag between the shutter-release button
being pressed and the picture being shot.
Pre-flash off
Pre-flashes do not fire. The shutter is released immediately when
the shutter-release button is pressed all the way, and the red-eye
reduction process is performed using picture compensation.
E78
The Setup Menu
Digital Zoom
Press the d button M z tab (A13) M Digital zoom
Enable or disable the digital zoom.
Option
Description
On (default setting)
When the camera is zoomed in to the maximum optical zoom
position, rotating and holding the zoom control toward g (i)
triggers the digital zoom (A31).
Crop
Limit zoom magnification up to the position of V during still
picture shooting. Also limit the digital zoom to the range at
which image quality of the shot still picture does not deteriorate
(A31).
• The digital zoom is not available when the image size is
M 3648×2736, E 3264×2448, I 3648×2432,
z 3584×2016 or H 2736×2736.
• During movie recording, digital zoom works as described in
On.
Off
The digital zoom is not activated.
Reference Section
B
Notes on Digital Zoom
• When the digital zoom is in effect, AF area mode is set to Center (spot) (E48).
• The digital zoom cannot be used when Scene auto selector, Portrait, Night portrait,
Backlighting with HDR set to On or Pet portrait is selected in scene mode.
• This feature may not be used in combination with certain features. See “Features That Cannot Be
Used Simultaneously” (A80) for more information.
• At magnifications of 1.2× to 1.8×, Metering is set to Center-weighted, and at magnifications of
2.0× to 4.0×, it is set to Spot.
• The digital zoom is not available for Zoom exposure (A47).
E79
The Setup Menu
Zoom Speed
Press the d button M z tab (A13) M Zoom speed
Set the zoom operation speed. Slow down the zoom speed to minimize the
recording of the zoom operating noise during movie recording.
Option
Description
Auto (default setting)
During still picture shooting, operate the zoom at the Normal
speed. During movie recording, operate the zoom at a lower
speed than Normal to minimize the recording of the zoom
operating noise. During still picture shooting, rotating the zoom
control all the way in either direction adjusts the zoom quickly,
while rotating the control partially adjusts the zoom slowly.
Normal
During both still picture shooting and movie recording, operate
the zoom at the standard speed. During both still picture
shooting and movie recording, rotating the zoom control all the
way in either direction adjusts the zoom quickly, while rotating
the control partially adjusts the zoom slowly.
Quiet
During both still picture shooting and movie recording, operate
the zoom at a lower speed than Normal.
Reference Section
The icon for the current setting other than Auto is displayed on the monitor (A8).
Fixed Aperture
Press the d button M z tab (A13) M Fixed aperture
Option
Description
On
In C or D shooting mode, zooming can be performed with
minimum changes in the aperture value.
• When f-number exceeds exposure range at new zoom
position, the aperture value is not fixed.
Off (default setting)
The aperture value is not fixed.
E80
The Setup Menu
Sound Settings
Press the d button M z tab (A13) M Sound settings
Adjust the following sound settings.
Option
Description
Button sound
Set the following all sound settings to On (default setting) or Off.
• Setting beep (beep sounds once when the settings are
completed)
• Focus beep (beep sounds twice when the camera focuses on
the subject)
• Error beep (beep sounds three times when an error is
detected)
• Start-up sounds
Shutter sound
Choose whether to set the shutter sound to On (default setting)
or Off.
B
Notes on Sound Settings
Record Orientation
Press the d button M z tab (A13) M Record orientation
Option
Reference Section
• In Pet portrait scene mode, even when On is set, the button sound and shutter sound are
disabled.
• Even when On is set, the shutter sound is disabled when scene mode is Backlighting with HDR
set to On or during movie recording.
• This feature may not be used in combination with certain features. See “Features That Cannot Be
Used Simultaneously” (A80) for more information.
Description
Auto (default setting)
The orientation data is recorded with the taken picture. When
played back while Rotate tall (E82) is set to On, the picture is
automatically rotated for display.
Off
The orientation data is not recorded and pictures are always
displayed in the horizontal position.
• The orientation data can be changed after shooting using Rotate image in the
playback menu (E66).
B
Notes on Recording the Orientation Data
• In Continuous or Auto bracketing mode, all pictures are recorded with the same orientation
data as the first picture.
• Correct orientation data may not be obtained for pictures recorded with the camera facing up or
down.
E81
The Setup Menu
Rotate Tall
Press the d button M z tab (A13) M Rotate tall
When On (default setting) is selected, pictures taken with orientation data in “tall”
or with face detection are automatically rotated in accordance with the recorded
orientation data for display.
15/11/2011 15:30
0004.JPG
4 132
15/11/2011 15:30
0004.JPG
4 132
Reference Section
Auto Off
Press the d button M z tab (A13) M Auto off
If no operations are performed for a certain period while the camera is on, the
monitor is turned off to save power and the camera enters standby mode (A25).
In this menu, set the time before the camera enters standby mode.
Choose from 30 s, 1 min (default setting), 5 min and 30 min.
C
Auto Off Setting
• In the following situations, the time taken for the camera to enter standby mode is fixed.
- When menus are displayed: three minutes
- When tone level information is displayed (shooting mode): three minutes
- During slideshow playback: maximum of 30 minutes
- When the AC Adapter EH-5b is connected: 30 minutes
• The camera does not enter standby mode when transferring images using the Eye-Fi card.
E82
The Setup Menu
Format Memory/Format Card
Press the d button M z tab (A13) M Format memory/Format card
Format the internal memory or a memory card.
Formatting permanently deletes all data in the internal memory or
memory card. The deleted data cannot be recovered. Be sure to transfer
important pictures to a computer before formatting.
Formatting the Internal Memory
To format the internal memory, remove the memory card from the camera. The
Format memory option is displayed on the setup menu.
Formatting Memory Cards
When a memory card is inserted in the camera, the memory card can be formatted.
The Format card option is displayed on the setup menu.
B
Formatting Internal Memory and Memory card
• Do not turn off the camera or open the battery-chamber/memory card slot cover during
formatting.
• The first time you insert a memory card that has been used in another device into this camera, be
sure to format it with this camera.
Reference Section
Language
Press the d button M z tab (A13) M Language
Choose one of 29 languages for displaying the camera menus and messages.
Czech
Danish
German
(default
setting)
Dutch
Norwegian
Polish
Brazilian
Portuguese
Spanish
Portuguese
Greek
French
Indonesian
Italian
Hungarian
Russian
Romanian
Finnish
Swedish
Vietnamese
Turkish
Ukrainian
Arabic
Simplified
Chinese
Traditional
Chinese
Japanese
Korean
Thai
Hindi
E83
The Setup Menu
TV Settings
Press the d button M z tab (A13) M TV settings
Adjust the settings for connecting to a TV.
Option
Description
Video mode
Select the analog video output system from NTSC or PAL in
accordance with your TV.
HDMI
Select a picture resolution for HDMI output from Auto (default
setting), 480p, 720p, or 1080i. When Auto is set, the output
resolution that is best suited to the connected TV is selected
automatically from 480p, 720p or 1080i.
HDMI device control
Select whether or not the camera receives signals from a TV
when a TV that conforms to the HDMI-CEC standard is
connected with an HDMI cable. When set to On (default setting),
the television remote control can be used to operate the camera
during playback.
See “Using the TV’s Remote Control (HDMI Device Control)”
(E21) for more information.
Reference Section
C
HDMI and HDMI-CEC
“HDMI” is an abbreviation of High-Definition Multimedia Interface, which is one type of multimedia
interface.
“HDMI-CEC” is an abbreviation of HDMI-Consumer Electronics Control, which enables operations to
be linked between compatible devices.
External Mic Sensitivity
Press the d button M z tab (A13) M External mic sensitivity
Select High if the sensitivity of the external microphone is low during movie
recording.
• The default setting is Auto.
E84
The Setup Menu
Built-in ND Filter
Press the d button M z tab (A13) M Built-in ND filter
When the camera’s built-in ND filter is used, the amount of light that enters the
camera while shooting can be reduced in three steps. Use in situations such as when
overexposure results from the subject being too bright. Set whether or not to use the
built-in ND filter to reduce the light in the following shooting modes.
• O (low noise night) mode
• A, B, C and D modes (including E, F and N modes)
In shooting modes other than the above, the on/off setting of the built-in ND filter
is controlled automatically according to the shooting mode and shooting
conditions, regardless of Built-in ND filter setting.
Option
Description
Use the ND filter to reduce the light.
Auto
In mode O (low noise night) or A (Programmed auto), when the
subject is too bright and the exposure range is exceeded, reduce
the light automatically with the ND filter.
• In shooting modes B, C and D, the ND filter is Off.
Off (default setting)
The ND filter is not used.
The icon for the current setting other than Off is displayed on the monitor (A8).
No icon is displayed when the setting is A (auto), scene or movie mode.
C
Reference Section
On
Effects of the Built-in ND Filter
Using the filter may enable the shooting of subjects that are too bright without overexposing the
image. It can also be used in situations such as when you want to slow down the shutter speed at a
low aperture value.
For example, at a shutter speed of 1/2000 second with the correct exposure, if the ND filter is used to
reduce the light in three steps, the speed can be changed to 1/250 second without changing the
aperture value.
E85
The Setup Menu
Customize Command Dials
Press the d button M z tab (A13) M Customize command dials
Option
Description
No swap
(default setting)
The respective functions operated using the main command dial
and sub-command dial are not swapped.
Swap main and sub
Swap the functions that can be operated using the main
command dial and sub-command dial when shooting pictures.
• The functions are not swapped for the playback or menu
screen.
Multi Selector Right Press
Press the d button M z tab (A13) M Multi selector right press
Set to Off if you do not want to display the AF area mode (E48) setting when
the multi selector K is pressed.
• The default setting is AF area mode.
Reference Section
Delete Button Options
Press the d button M z tab (A13) M Delete button options
Option
Description
Press twice to delete
Press the l button once more to delete an image while the
deletion confirmation message is displayed (A36).
Disable second press
(default setting)
Even if the l button is pressed again while the deletion
confirmation message is displayed, the image is not deleted.
E86
The Setup Menu
AE/AF Lock Button
Press the d button M z tab (A13) M AE/AF lock button
Select the function to be performed when the g (AE-L/AF-L) button (A5) is
pressed while shooting.
Option
Description
AE/AF lock
(default setting)
Lock both the focus and exposure when the g (AE-L/AF-L)
button is pressed.
AE lock only
Lock only the exposure when the g (AE-L/AF-L) button is pressed.
AF lock only
Lock only the focus when the g (AE-L/AF-L) button is pressed.
The g (AE-L/AF-L) button setting is displayed on the monitor during shooting (A8).
• During still picture shooting, lock only when the AE/AF-L button is pressed.
• During movie recording, lock when the AE/AF-L button is pressed, and release
when the button is pressed again.
Reference Section
B
Notes on AE/AF Lock Button Setting
• The g (AE-L/AF-L) button cannot be used when Scene auto selector is selected in scene mode.
• AE-L (exposure locking) cannot be used when the shooting mode is set to D.
• AF-L (focus locking) cannot be used when focus mode (A67) is set to E (manual focus).
C
More Information
See “Focus Lock” (A33) for more information.
E87
The Setup Menu
Fn1 + Shutter Button
Press the d button M z tab (A13) M Fn1 + shutter button
Set the function to be performed when the shutter-release button is pressed while
pressing the w1 (FUNC1) button (A2) during shooting.
• This can be used when A, B, C, D, E, F or N is chosen for shooting mode.
Option
Description
Off (default setting)
Shoot without changing the setting.
NRW (RAW)/Normal
(Image quality) (A75)
When Fine, Normal or Basic is set, shoot with the NRW (RAW)
setting. When NRW (RAW) is set, shoot with the Normal
setting.
• The image size is M 3648×2736.
• When NRW (RAW) + Fine, NRW (RAW) + Normal or NRW
(RAW) + Basic is set, shoot without changing the setting.
ISO sensitivity (E30)
Shoot with ISO sensitivity set to Auto.
White balance (E32)
Shoot with White balance set to Auto (normal).
• Cannot be used when Picture Control is set to
Monochrome.
Picture Control (E38)
Shoot with Picture Control set to Standard.
Reference Section
E88
The Setup Menu
Fn1 + Command Dial
Press the d button M z tab (A13) M Fn1 + command dial
Set the function to be performed when the command dial is rotated while pressing
the w1 (FUNC1) button during shooting.
• Rotating either the main command dial or sub-command dial enables the
operation.
Option
Description
Shoot without the function. Operation will be disabled.
Manual focus (E2)
When the focus mode is set to manual focus, the focus can be
adjusted.
Metering (E44)
Change the setting for metering.
Continuous (E45)
Change the settings for continuous shooting.
Flash exp. comp.
(E52)
Change the setting for Flash exp. comp.
Active D-Lighting
(E56)
Change the setting for Active D-Lighting.
Manual flash level
(A62)
Change the flash output set for the built-in flash when the flash
mode is set to manual.
B
Note on Fn1 + Command Dial
Operation is disabled when AE or AF is locked (except when recording a movie).
Reference Section
Off (default setting)
Fn1 Guide Display
Press the d button M z tab (A13) M Fn1 guide display
Option
Description
On (default setting)
The w1 button operation indicator (A8) and the functions
assigned to the Fn1 + shutter button (E88) and Fn1 +
command dial (E89) are displayed while the w1 (FUNC1)
button is pressed.
Off
Even if the w1 button is pressed, guide is not displayed.
E89
The Setup Menu
Fn2 Button
Press the d button M z tab (A13) M Fn2 button
Choose the function to be performed when the w2 button (A2) is pressed while
shooting.
Option
Off (default setting)
Description
Shoot without the function. Operation will be disabled.
Virtual horizon,
Select whether to view or hide the virtual horizon, histogram or
View/hide histograms,
framing grid displays (E74) on the monitor during shooting.
View/hide framing grid
Built-in ND filter
Change the built-in ND filter (E85) setting.
Customize My Menu
Press the d button M z tab (A13) M Customize My Menu
Reference Section
Register frequently used menu items in My Menu
(maximum of five). The registered My Menu can be
displayed when the quick menu dial is set to I and the
quick menu button is pressed, allowing settings to be
quickly checked or changed (only when shooting mode
is set to A, B, C, D, E, F or N).
The following items can be registered.
Custom Picture Control
Metering
Continuous
AF area mode
Autofocus mode
Single
Custom Picture Control
(E43)
Noise reduction filter (E53) Vibration reduction (E76)
Metering (E44)
Long exposure NR (E53)
Digital zoom (E79)
Continuous (E45)
Distortion control (E54)
Format memory/Format card
(E83)
AF area mode (E48)
Wide-angle converter (E54) Built-in ND filter (E85)
Autofocus mode (E52)
Flash control (E55)
Eye-Fi upload (E93)
Flash exp. comp. (E52)
Active D-Lighting (E56)
- (no setting) (delete)*
*
E90
Choose to remove an item from My Menu.
The Setup Menu
Registering into My Menu
1
Use the multi selector to choose the menu
item and press the k button.
• The menu item selection screen is displayed.
2
Choose the menu item to be registered and
press the k button.
• The chosen menu item is switched.
• To finish the setting, press the multi selector J.
Customize My Menu
Custom Picture Control
Metering
Continuous
AF area mode
Autofocus mode
Customize My Menu : 1
Custom Picture Control
Metering
Continuous
AF area mode
Autofocus mode
Flash exp. comp.
Flash control
Reset File Numbering
When Yes is selected, the sequential numbering of file numbers is reset (E99).
After resetting, a new folder is created and the file number for the next picture
taken starts from “0001.”
B
Reference Section
Press the d button M z tab (A13) M Reset file numbering
Notes on Reset file numbering
• Reset file numbering cannot be used when scene mode is set to Panorama assist, or if Intvl
timer shooting is chosen for Continuous when A, B, C, D, E, F or N shooting modes are
used. For Panorama assist or Intvl timer shooting, a new folder is created, and file numbers are
assigned automatically starting with “0001” (E99, 100).
• Reset file numbering cannot be applied when the folder number reaches 999 and there are
images in the folder. Insert a new memory card, or format the internal memory/memory card
(E83).
E91
The Setup Menu
Blink Warning
Press the d button M z tab (A13) M Blink warning
Choose whether or not blinking eyes are detected when using face detection
(A85) in the following shooting modes.
• In the following scene modes: Scene auto selector (A40), Portrait (A40) or
Night portrait (A41)
• Shooting modes A, B, C, D, E, F, N, O (low noise night) and u
(special effects) (when Face priority (E48) is selected for AF area mode)
Option
Description
On
The Did someone blink? screen is displayed on the monitor if
the camera detects that a human subject may have closed the
eyes immediately after recognizing the face. The face of the
human subject that may have closed his/her eyes is framed by a
yellow border. You can check the picture taken and determine if
you need to take the picture again.
Off (default setting)
The camera does not detect blinks.
The Did someone blink? Screen
Reference Section
If no operations are performed for a few seconds, the
Did someone blink?
screen automatically returns to the shooting screen.
• To zoom in the face for which blinking was detected,
rotate the zoom control toward g (i). To return to
full-frame playback mode, rotate the zoom control
Exit
toward f (h).
• When the camera detects that one or more human
subjects have closed their eyes, press H, I, J or K during playback zoom to
display other faces. Other faces can also be displayed by rotating the main
command dial.
• Press the l button to delete the picture taken.
• Press the k button to return to shooting screen.
B
Note on Blink Warning
This feature may not be used in combination with certain features. See “Features That Cannot Be Used
Simultaneously” (A80) for more information.
E92
The Setup Menu
Eye-Fi Upload
Press the d button M z tab (A13) M Eye-Fi upload
Option
Description
Enable
Upload images created by the camera to a preselected
destination.
Disable (default
setting)
Images will not be uploaded.
B
Notes on Eye-Fi Cards
C
Reference Section
• Note that images will not be uploaded if signal strength is insufficient even if Enable is selected.
• Select Disable where wireless devices are prohibited.
• Refer to the instruction manual of your Eye-Fi card for more information. In the event of
malfunction, contact the card manufacturer.
• The camera can be used to turn Eye-Fi cards on and off, but may not support other Eye-Fi
functions.
• If the Eye-Fi card where Eye-Fi upload cannot be set to off is inserted, Eye-Fi upload cannot be set.
• The camera is not compatible with the endless memory function. When it is set on a computer,
disable the function. If the endless memory function is enabled, the number of pictures taken may
not be displayed correctly.
• Eye-Fi cards are for use only in the country of purchase. Observe all local laws concerning wireless
devices.
• Leaving the setting as Enable will result in the battery being depleted in a shorter period of time.
Eye-Fi communication indicator
The communication status of the Eye-Fi card in the camera can be confirmed on the monitor (A8).
• w: Eye-Fi upload is set to Disable.
• x (lights): Eye-Fi upload enabled; waiting to begin upload.
• x (blinks): Eye-Fi upload enabled; uploading data.
• y: Eye-Fi upload enabled but no images available for upload.
• z: An error occurred. The camera cannot control the Eye-Fi card.
C
Supported Eye-Fi Cards
As of August 2011, the following Eye-Fi cards can be used. Be sure that Eye-Fi card firmware has
been updated to the latest version.
• Eye-Fi Connect X2 SDHC 4GB
• Eye-Fi Mobile X2 SDHC 8GB
• Eye-Fi Pro X2 SDHC 8GB
E93
The Setup Menu
MF Distance Indicator Units
Press the d button M z tab (A13) M MF distance indicator units
Set either m (meter) (default setting) or ft (feet) for the unit of gauge displayed
when the focus mode is set to manual focus (E2).
Reverse Indicators
Press the d button M z tab (A13) M Reverse indicators
Change the +/- display direction of the exposure indicator (A53) displayed when
shooting mode is D and the indicator displayed for setting bracketing (E36).
The + side of the indicators is set to the left and - side is set to the right in the
default setting.
Reset All
Reference Section
Press the d button M z tab (A13) M Reset all
When Reset is selected, the camera settings are restored to the default values.
Pop-up Menu
Option
Default value
Flash mode (A61)
Auto
Self-timer (A64)/Smile timer (A65)/
Remote control (E105)
OFF
Focus mode (A67)
Autofocus
Shooting in the Scene Mode
Default value
Option
Scene menu (A39)
Scene auto selector
Hue adjustment in Food mode (A43)
Center
HDR in Backlighting (A44)
Off
Pet portrait (A45)
Pet portrait auto release: On
Continuous: Continuous
E94
The Setup Menu
Special Effects Menu
Option
Special effects (A48)
Default value
Creative monochrome
Low Noise Night Mode Menu
Option
Default value
Single
Continuous (A50)
Flash exp. comp. (A50)
0.0
Metering (A50)
Matrix
Movie Menu
Option
Default value
Autofocus mode (E69)
Single AF
Wind noise reduction (E69)
Off
Quick Menu
Option
Default value
Normal
Image size (A77)
M 3648×2736
Movie options (E42)
HD 720p (1280×720)
ISO sensitivity (E31)
Auto
Minimum shutter speed (E31)
None
White balance (E32)
Auto (normal)
Auto bracketing (E36)
Off
Picture Control (E38)
Standard
Reference Section
Image quality (A75)
E95
The Setup Menu
Shooting Menu
Option
Default value
Metering (E44)
Matrix
Continuous (E45)
Single
Intvl timer shooting (E46)
30 s
AF area mode (E48)
Auto
Autofocus mode (E52)
Single AF
Flash exp. comp. (E52)
0.0
Noise reduction filter (E53)
Normal
Long exposure NR (E53)
Auto
Distortion control (E54)
Off
Wide-angle converter (E54)
None
Flash control (E55)
Auto
Active D-Lighting (E56)
Off
Zoom memory (E57)
All values are chosen
Setup Menu
Option
Default value
Reference Section
Welcome screen (E70)
None
Image review (E74)
On
Brightness (E74)
3
Photo info (E74)
Hide all items
Virtual horizon display (E74)
Circle
Print date (E75)
Off
Self-timer: after release (E76)
Exit self-timer mode
Vibration reduction (E76)
On
Motion detection (E77)
Off
AF assist (E78)
Auto
Red-eye reduction (E78)
Pre-flash on
Digital zoom (E79)
On
Zoom speed (E80)
Auto
Fixed aperture (E80)
Off
Button sound (E81)
On
Shutter sound (E81)
On
Record orientation (E81)
Auto
Rotate tall (E82)
On
E96
The Setup Menu
Option
Default value
1 min
HDMI (E84)
Auto
HDMI device control (E84)
On
External mic sensitivity (E84)
Auto
Built-in ND filter (E85)
Off
Customize command dials (E86)
No swap
Multi selector right press (E86)
AF area mode
Delete button options (E86)
Disable second press
AE/AF lock button (E87)
AE/AF lock
Fn1 + shutter button (E88)
Off
Fn1 + command dial (E89)
Off
Fn1 guide display (E89)
On
Fn2 button (E90)
Off
Customize My Menu (E90)
1: Custom Picture Control
2: Metering
3: Continuous
4: AF area mode
5: Autofocus mode
Blink warning (E92)
Off
Eye-Fi upload (E93)
Disable
MF distance indicator units (E94)
m
Reverse indicators (E94)
+0-
Reference Section
Auto off (E82)
Others
Option
Default value
Paper size (E24, 25)
Default
Frame intvl for Slide show (E63)
3s
E97
The Setup Menu
• Choosing Reset all also clears the current file number (E99) in the memory.
After resetting, numbering continues from the lowest number available in the
internal memory or the memory card. If Reset all is performed after all pictures
are deleted from the internal memory or memory card (E64), the file numbers
for the next pictures taken start from “0001.”
• The following settings remain unaffected even if Reset all is performed.
Quick menu: Preset manual data for White balance (E35)
Shooting menu: Custom Picture Control registration (E43)
Setup menu: Time zone and date (E71), Language (E83) and Video
mode (E84) in TV settings
• User settings that were saved for mode dial E, F and N are not reset to the
default settings when Reset all is performed. To change these settings back to
the default settings, use Reset user settings (A58).
Firmware Version
Press the d button M z tab (A13) M Firmware version
Displays the current camera firmware version.
Reference Section
E98
COOLPIX P7100 Ver.X.X
Back
File and Folder Names
Pictures, movies and voice memos are assigned file names as follows.
DSCN0001.JPG
Identifier
(not displayed on camera monitor)
Original still pictures (voice
memo attachment
included), movies
Small copies (voice memo
attachment included)
Cropped copies (voice
memo attachment included)
Pictures created with picture
editing other than cropping
and small picture and
attached voice memos,
movies created with movie
editing
DSCN
SSCN
RSCN
Extension
(signifies the file type)
Still pictures
RAW still pictures
Movies
Voice memos
.JPG
.NRW
.MOV
.WAV
File number (assigned automatically in
ascending order, starting with “0001”)
FSCN
Reference Section
• A folder for storing files is automatically created using the following naming
convention: “Folder number + NIKON” (e.g., “100NIKON”). If there are 200 files in
a folder, a new folder is created. (For example, the folder name following
“100NIKON” becomes “101NIKON.”) A new folder is also created when the file
numbers in a folder reach 9999 or Reset file numbering (E91) is performed.
The next file number is set automatically to “0001.”
If a folder contains no files, a new folder is not created even if Reset file
numbering is performed.
• When images are shot with an Image quality (A75) setting of NRW (RAW) +
Fine, NRW (RAW) + Normal or NRW (RAW) + Basic, the NRW (RAW) and JPEG
images that are recorded at the same time are assigned the same file name. The
NRW (RAW) and JPEG images that are recorded at the same time are saved in
the same folder. If there are 199 files in a folder, a new folder is created and the
images are saved in the new folder.
• Voice memo file names have the same identifier and file number as the picture
to which the voice memo is attached.
E99
File and Folder Names
• In Panorama assist (A45), a folder is created for each shooting session using
the following naming convention: “Folder number + P_XXX” (e.g., “101P_001”).
Pictures are saved in sequence in file numbers starting from 0001.
• Each time a picture is taken in Interval timer shooting (E46), a folder named
with the convention: 'Folder number + INTVL' (e.g., 101INTVL) is created.
Pictures are saved in sequence in file numbers starting from 0001.
• When image files or voice files are copied to or from the internal memory or
memory card (E68), the file naming conventions are as follows:
- Files copied using selected images are copied to the current folder (or to the
folder used for subsequent pictures), where they are assigned file numbers in
ascending order following the largest file number in memory.
- Files copied using all images, along with their folder, are copied together.
Folder numbers are assigned in ascending order, following the largest folder
number on the destination medium.
File names are not changed.
• When the current folder is numbered 999, if there are 200 files in the folder or if
a file is numbered 9999, no further pictures can be shot until the internal
memory or memory card is formatted (E83), or a new memory card is
inserted.
Reference Section
E100
Speedlights (External Flash Unit)
The camera is equipped with an accessory shoe, allowing the following
Speedlights or Wireless Speedlight Commander to be attached to the camera. Use
the Speedlights when the built-in flash cannot provide sufficient lighting.
• Speedlights SB-400, SB-600, SB-700, SB-800, SB-900
• Wireless Speedlight Commander SU-800
The built-in flash is set to W (off) automatically when using Speedlights. While p is
displayed on the monitor, the Speedlight flash mode is also displayed on the
monitor, and it can be set with the same procedure as the built-in flash (A61).
How to Attach a Speedlight
• Remove the accessory shoe cover before attaching a
Speedlight as shown on the right.
• When the built-in flash is raised, gently push to lower
the flash until it clicks shut.
• Refer to the instruction manual of your Speedlight for
more information on how to attach Speedlight and
details on how to use it.
• Replace the accessory shoe cover when the Speedlight is not in use.
Reference Section
B
Note on External Flash
Attempting to attach external flashes that do not support this camera may damage the camera and
the external flash.
E101
Speedlights (External Flash Unit)
B
Use Only Nikon Flash Accessories
Use only Nikon Speedlights. Negative voltages or voltages over 250 V applied to the accessory shoe
could not only prevent normal operation, but damage the sync circuitry of the camera or flash.
C
Speedlights SB-400, SB-600, SB-700, SB-800 and SB-900
Reference Section
• Before using Speedlights SB-600, SB-700, SB-800 or SB-900, set the Speedlight flash control mode
to TTL. This enables the Standard i-TTL flash control to use monitor pre-flashes to adjust flash
output automatically in response to lighting conditions. Refer to the instruction manual of your
Speedlight for more information on i-TTL flash control.
• Wireless multiple flash-unit photography can be performed by setting the SB-700, SB-800, SB-900
or Wireless Speedlight Commander SU-800 to “commander,” and setting the SB-600, SB-700, SB800 and SB-900 to “remote flash unit.” However, the flash is not usable even if the monitor preflashes are fired when the SB-900 is set to “commander.”
The Wireless multiple flash group setting is only applicable to group A. Change the setting for
both the commander and the remote flash unit to group A. Refer to the instruction manual of your
Speedlight for more information.
• When wireless multiple flash-unit photography is performed, if ISO sensitivity is set to Auto, High
ISO sensitivity auto, ISO 100-200 or ISO 100-400, it is fixed at ISO 100.
• The camera does not support Flash Color Information Communication, Auto FP High-Speed Sync,
FV lock, or AF-assist for multi-area AF when using Speedlights SB-600, SB-700, SB-800 or SB-900.
• Power zoom function can be used with Speedlights SB-600, SB-700, SB-800 or SB-900, setting
zoom head position automatically depending upon focal length.
• When using Speedlights SB-600, SB-700, SB-800 or SB-900, the edges of pictures shot at ranges
under 2 m (6 ft 7 in.) on the zoom wide-angle position may appear dark. In such cases, use the
wide-flash adapter.
• When set to STBY (standby), the Speedlight turns on and off at the same time as the camera.
Confirm on the Speedlight that the Ready-light is on.
E102
Optional Accessories
Rechargeable
battery
Rechargeable Li-ion Battery EN-EL141
Battery charger
Battery Charger MH-241, 2
AC Adapter EH-5b (connect as shown) and Power Connector EP-5A
(connect as shown)
When the Power Connector is inserted into the camera and the AC
Adapter is connected, the camera can be powered from an electrical
outlet.
The AC Adapter and the Power Connector are available separately.
1
2
3
AC adapter/
Power connector
USB cable
USB Cable UC-E61
Audio/Video cable
Audio Video Cable EG-CP161
Converter lens
Wide-angle Converter WC-E75A (0.75×)
(requires Adapter Ring UR-E22)
Lens adapter ring
Adapter Ring UR-E22
Reference Section
Before closing the battery-chamber/memory card slot cover, fully
insert the cord of the power connector into the slot in the battery
chamber. If part of the cord runs out of the slot, the cover or cord
may be damaged when the cover is closed.
Insert the DC plug of the AC Adapter EH-5b into the DC plug
connector of the Power Connector EP-5A.
Speedlight
Speedlight SB-400, SB-600, SB-700, SB-900
(external flash unit) Wireless Speedlight Commander SU-800
External
microphone
Stereo Microphone ME-1
E103
Optional Accessories
Remote Control ML-L3
How to replace the battery (3 V CR2025 lithium battery) in the
remote control.
Remote control
• When changing the remote control battery, be sure that the
battery’s positive (+) and negative (-) terminals are oriented
correctly.
• Be sure to read and follow the warnings for the battery on page vii
and the section, “The Battery” (F3).
1
2
Included with the camera at the time of purchase (see “Confirming the Package Contents”
(Aii) for more information).
When using in other countries, use a commercially available plug adapter as necessary. For
more information about plug adapters, consult your travel agency.
Reference Section
See our websites or product catalogs for up-to-date information on accessories for
the COOLPIX P7100.
B
Notes on Converter and Adapter Ring
• Be sure to set Wide-angle converter (E54) to On.
• Do not attach lens hoods or filters to the converter lens or adapter ring, as they may cause shading
around the edges of images.
E104
Optional Accessories
Shooting with Remote Control
Use the Remote Control ML-L3 (available separately) (E104) to release the
shutter. It is convenient for taking self-portraits and effectively eliminates blur
caused by camera shake that occurs when the shutter-release button is pressed.
Use of a tripod is recommended during shooting with the remote control. Set
Vibration reduction (E76) in the setup menu to Off when using a tripod to
stabilize the camera.
1
Press J (n self-timer) on the rotary multi
selector.
2
Select remote control mode using the multi
selector and press K to display the setting.
3
Reference Section
• Select the remote control setting and press the k
button.
• Z (quick-response remote): Press the transmission
Remote control
button on the remote control to shoot instantly.
• Z 10s (ten seconds remote): Press the transmission
button on the remote control to shoot with ten-second delay.
• Z 2s (two seconds remote): Press the transmission button on the remote control to
shoot with two-second delay.
• The icon for the selected remote control mode is displayed.
• If the k button is not pressed within a few seconds, the selection is set and the
setting menu disappears.
Frame the picture.
1/250
F5.6
1342
E105
Optional Accessories
4
Aim the transmitter at the infrared
receiver on the front or rear of the camera
(A2, 3) and press the transmission
button.
Rear
Front
• Press the transmission button from a distance of
5 m (16 ft) or less.
• In the quick-response remote mode, once the
subject is in focus, the shutter is released.
• In ten seconds or two seconds remote mode, the
self-timer lamp blinks when the subject is in focus,
and then about one second before the shutter is
released, the lamp stops blinking and remains lit.
To stop the timer before a picture is taken, press
the transmission button again.
• When the shutter is released in ten seconds or two seconds remote mode, the remote
control mode turns to Off.
Reference Section
B
Note on the Remote Control
This feature may not be used in combination with certain features. See “Features That Cannot Be
Used Simultaneously” (A80) for more information.
E106
Error Messages
The following table lists the error messages and other warnings displayed on the
monitor, as well as the solutions for dealing with them.
Display
Description
A
Solution
O
(blinks)
Clock not set.
Set date and time.
E71
N
Battery exhausted.
Battery exhausted.
Charge or replace the battery.
18, 20
P
Battery temperature
high
Turn off camera, and allow battery to
cool down before resuming use. Five
seconds after this message appears,
the monitor is turned off, and the
Battery temperature is power-on lamp, the AF/access lamp
25
high.
and the flash lamp flicker. After the
lamps blink for three minutes, the
camera turns off automatically, but
you can also press the power switch
to turn it off manually.
P
The camera will turn off
to prevent overheating.
Inside of the camera
has become hot. The
camera turns off
automatically.
P
Please wait for the
camera to finish
recording.
Camera cannot
Wait until message clears from
perform other
display automatically when
operations until
recording is complete.
recording is complete.
–
N
Memory card is write
protected.
Write-protect switch
Slide the write-protect switch to
of the memory card is
“write” position.
in “lock” position.
–
Write-protect switch
of Eye-Fi card is in
“lock” position.
Slide the write-protect switch to
“write” position.
–
Error accessing Eye-Fi
card.
• Use an approved card.
• Check that connectors are clean.
• Confirm that memory card is
correctly inserted.
–
Reference Section
N
Not available if Eye-Fi
card is locked.
Leave the camera off until the inside
of the camera has cooled and then
turn it on again.
23
22
22
E107
Error Messages
Display
P
This card cannot be
used.
P
This card cannot be read.
P
Card is not formatted.
Format card?
Yes
No
N
Out of memory.
Description
Error accessing
memory card.
• Use an approved card.
• Check that connectors are clean.
• Confirm that memory card is
correctly inserted.
Memory card has not
been formatted for
use in this camera.
All data stored on the memory
card is deleted when formatted. If
there is any data on the card that you
want to keep, select No, and backup
22
the data to a computer before
formatting the memory card. To
format the memory card, select
Yes and press the k button.
• Choose lower image quality or
smaller image size.
• Delete pictures and movies.
Memory card is full.
• Replace memory card.
• Remove memory card and use
internal memory.
Reference Section
Error occurred while
recording picture.
Format the internal memory or
memory card.
Camera has run out of Replace the memory card, or format
file numbers.
the internal memory/memory card.
P
Image cannot be saved.
Picture cannot be
used for welcome
screen.
There is insufficient
space to save a copy.
P
Sound file cannot be
saved.
E108
A
Solution
The following pictures cannot be
used.
• NRW (RAW) images
• Pictures taken with Image size of
I 3648×2432, z 3584×2016
or H 2736×2736
• Pictures created with small picture
or crop function that are 320 × 240
or smaller
Delete pictures from destination.
• Voice memos cannot be attached
A voice memo cannot
to movies.
be attached to this file. • Select a picture taken with this
camera.
23
22
22
75, 77
36, 102,
E64
22
23
E83
22,
E83
75
77
E14,
E19
E64
–
E67
Error Messages
Display
Description
A
Solution
N
Image cannot be
modified.
Cannot edit selected
picture.
• Confirm the conditions that are
E9
required for editing.
• RAW processing cannot be
–
performed for NRW (RAW) pictures
that were taken with cameras
other than COOLPIX P7100.
• These options cannot be used
–
with movies.
N
Cannot record movie.
Time out error while
recording movie.
Choose memory card with faster
write speed.
N
Cannot reset file
numbering.
No more folders can
be created.
Insert a new memory card, or format 22,
the internal memory/memory card. E83
N
Memory contains no
images.
No pictures in the
internal memory or
memory card.
• Pictures stored in the internal
22
memory can only be viewed if no
memory card is inserted.
• To copy files from internal memory E68
to memory card, press the d
button to display the copy screen,
then copy the files from internal
memory to memory card.
N
File contains no image
data.
File not created with
COOLPIX P7100.
File cannot be viewed on this
camera.
View file using the computer or any
other devices which was used to
create or edit this file.
–
–
E63
All images in the
internal memory/
memory card are
hidden.
Disable the Hide image setting to
view images.
E66
N
This image cannot be
deleted.
Picture is protected.
Disable protection.
E66
N
Travel destination is in
the current time zone.
Destination in same
time zone as home.
–
E73
P
Mode dial is not in the
proper position.
Mode dial is between Rotate the mode dial to select the
desired mode.
two modes.
Reference Section
N
All images are hidden.
The picture cannot be
played back in a slide
show.
23
28
E109
Error Messages
Display
Description
A
Solution
• Check the settings of functions
E90
that are not registered in My Menu.
• Change the menu item to be
E90
registered in My Menu.
N
My Menu can not be
changed at current
settings.
All registered menu
items cannot be
changed at the
current setting.
N
Raise the flash.
The flash is lowered
when the scene mode
is Night portrait or
Press the K (flash pop-up) button
Backlighting with
to raise the flash.
HDR set to Off or the
Continuous mode is
Continuous flash.
41,
44,
61,
E45
Press the K (flash pop-up) button
The flash is not raised
to raise the flash. The camera can still
during the scene auto
40, 61
shoot normally with the flash
selector.
lowered if you do not wish to use it.
Reference Section
P
Speedlight setting error
Group A has not been
selected for group
Set the group setting of the master
setting when
commander and remote flash unit to E102
shooting using
Group A.
wireless multiple flashunit photography.
Lens error
Q
Lens is not operating
properly.
Turn camera off and then on again. If
error persists, contact retailer or
25
Nikon-authorized service
representative.
P
Communications error
Error occurred during
communication with
printer.
Turn off camera and reconnect cable. E23
System error
Q
Error has occurred in
camera’s internal
circuitry.
Turn off camera, remove and reinsert
battery, and turn on camera. If the
error persists, contact retailer or
25
Nikon-authorized service
representative.
Q
Initializing lens. Cannot
focus.
The camera cannot
focus.
Wait until the camera recovers
automatically.
E110
–
Error Messages
Display
PR
Printer error: check
printer status.
Description
Printer error
A
Solution
Check printer. After solving the
problem, select Resume and press
the k button to resume printing.*
Load the specified size of paper,
Specified size of paper
PR
select Resume and press the k
Printer error: check paper is not loaded.
button to resume printing.*
–
–
PR
Printer error: paper jam
Paper has jammed in
the printer.
Remove the jammed paper, select
Resume and press the k button to
resume printing.*
–
PR
Printer error: out of
paper
No paper is loaded in
the printer.
Load the specified size of paper,
select Resume and press the k
button to resume printing.*
–
PR
Printer error: check ink
Ink error
Check ink, select Resume and press
the k button to resume printing.*
–
PR
Printer error: out of ink
Replace ink cartridge, select Resume
–
Ink cartridge is empty. and press the k button to resume
printing.*
PR
Printer error: file corrupt
An error caused by the
Select Cancel and press the k
image file has
button to cancel printing.
occurred.
–
Reference Section
* See the instruction manual provided with your printer for further guidance and information.
E111
E112
Technical Notes and Index
Caring for the Products .............................................F2
The Camera.............................................................................................................F2
The Battery..............................................................................................................F3
The Battery Charger.............................................................................................F4
The Memory Cards...............................................................................................F5
Caring for the Camera ...............................................F6
Cleaning...................................................................................................................F6
Storage .....................................................................................................................F6
Troubleshooting........................................................F7
Specifications...........................................................F13
Supported Standards....................................................................................... F16
F1
Technical Notes and Index
Index .........................................................................F17
Technical Notes and Index
Caring for the Products
The Camera
To ensure continued enjoyment of this Nikon product, observe the following
precautions when using or storing the device.
Be sure to read and follow the warnings of “For your Safety” (Avi to Aviii)
thoroughly before using the products.
B
Keep Dry
The device will be damaged if immersed in water or subjected to high humidity.
B
Do Not Drop
The product may malfunction if subjected to strong shock or vibration.
B
Handle the Lens and All Moving Parts with Care
Do not apply force to the lens, lens cover, monitor, memory card slot, or battery chamber. These
parts are easily damaged. Applying force to the lens cover could result in camera malfunction or
damage to the lens. Should the monitor break, care should be taken to avoid injury caused by
broken glass and to prevent the liquid crystal from the display touching the skin or entering the eyes
or mouth.
B
Do Not Point the Lens at Strong Light Sources for Extended Periods
Technical Notes and Index
Avoid pointing the lens at the sun or other strong light sources for extended periods when using or
storing the camera. Intense light may cause deterioration of the CCD image sensor, producing a
white blur effect in photographs.
B
Keep away from Strong Magnetic Fields
Do not use or store this device in the vicinity of equipment that generates strong electromagnetic
radiation or magnetic fields. Strong static charge or the magnetic fields produced by equipment
such as radio transmitters could interfere with the monitor, damage data saved on the memory card,
or affect the product’s internal circuitry.
B
Avoid Sudden Changes in Temperature
Sudden changes in temperature, such as when entering or leaving a heated building on a cold day,
can cause condensation to form inside the device. To prevent condensation, place the device in a
carrying case or a plastic bag before exposing it to sudden changes in temperature.
B
Turn the Product off Before Removing or Disconnecting the Power Source
or the Memory Card
Do not remove the battery while the product is on, or while images are being saved or deleted.
Forcibly cutting power in these circumstances could result in loss of data or in damage to product
memory or internal circuitry.
F2
Caring for the Products
B
The Monitor
• The monitor may contain a few pixels that are always lit or that do not light. This is a characteristic
common to all TFT LCD displays, and does not indicate a malfunction. Images saved using the
product will not be affected.
• White or colored streaks of light may be visible on the monitor with framing of bright subjects.
This phenomenon, known as “smear,” occurs when extremely bright light strikes the image sensor.
This is due to characteristics of the image sensor and does not indicate a malfunction. Smear may
also cause partial discoloration on monitor display with shooting. Smear does not affect recorded
images except when shooting with Continuous set to Multi-shot 16 and when recording movies.
When shooting in these modes, avoiding bright objects such as the sun, reflections of the sun, and
electric lights is recommended.
• Images on the monitor may be difficult to see under bright lighting.
• The monitor is lit by an LED backlight. Should the monitor begin to dim or flicker, contact your
Nikon-authorized service representative.
The Battery
F3
Technical Notes and Index
• Be sure to read and follow the warnings of “For Your Safety” (Avi to Aviii)
thoroughly before using the battery.
• Check the battery level before using the camera and replace or charge the
battery if necessary. Do not continue charging once the battery is fully charged
as this will result in reduced battery performance. Whenever possible, carry a
fully charged spare battery when taking pictures on important occasions.
• Do not use the battery at ambient temperatures below 0°C (32°F) or above 40°C
(104°F).
• Charge the battery indoors with an ambient temperature of 5°C to 35°C (41°F to
95°F) before use.
• When the battery temperature is between 0°C and 10°C (32°F to 50°F) or 45°C to
60°C (113°F to 140°F), the chargeable capacity may decrease.
• The battery is not charged at ambient temperatures below 0°C (32°F) or above
60°C (140°F).
• Note that the battery may become hot during use; wait for the battery to cool
before charging. Failure to observe these precautions could damage the
battery, impair its performance, or prevent it from charging normally.
• On cold days, the capacity of batteries tends to decrease. Be sure that the
battery is fully charged before heading outside to take pictures in cold weather.
Keep spare batteries in a warm place and exchange as necessary. Once warmed,
a cold battery may recover some of its charge.
• Dirt on the battery terminals can prevent the camera from functioning. Should
the battery terminals become dirty, wipe them off with a clean, dry cloth before
use.
Caring for the Products
• If the battery will not be used for some time, insert it in the camera and run it flat
before removing it for storage. The battery should be stored in a cool location
with an ambient temperature of 15°C to 25°C (59°F to 77°F). Do not store the
battery in hot or extremely cold locations.
• Always remove the battery from the camera or battery charger when it is not
being used. When inserted, minute amounts of current are drawn from the
battery even when not in use. This may result in excessive draining of the
battery and complete loss of function. Turning the camera on or off while the
battery is exhausted can result in reduced battery life. When the battery level is
low, be sure to charge the battery before using it.
• Recharge the battery at least once every six months and completely exhaust it
before returning it to storage.
• After removing the battery from the camera or battery charger, attach the
included terminal cover to the battery and store it in a cool place.
• A marked drop in the time a fully-charged battery retains its charge, when used
at room temperature, indicates that the battery needs to be replaced. Purchase
a new EN-EL14 battery.
• Replace the battery when it no longer holds a charge. Used batteries are a
valuable resource. Please recycle used batteries in accordance with local
regulations.
Technical Notes and Index
The Battery Charger
• Be sure to read and follow the warnings of “For Your Safety” (Avi to Aviii)
thoroughly before using the battery charger.
• The included Battery Charger is for use only with a Rechargeable Li-ion Battery
EN-EL14.
• The MH-24 is compatible with AC 100-240 V, 50/60 Hz electrical outlets. When
using in other countries, use a commercially available plug adapter as necessary.
For more information about plug adapters, consult your travel agency.
F4
Caring for the Products
The Memory Cards
F5
Technical Notes and Index
• Use only Secure Digital memory cards. See “Approved Memory Cards” (A23).
• Be sure to observe the precautions in the memory card documentation when
you use the memory card.
• Do not affix labels or stickers to the memory card.
• Do not format the memory card using a computer.
• When a memory card is used for the first time, it is recommended to format it with
this camera. In particular, the first time you insert a memory card that has been
used in another device into this camera, be sure to format it with this camera.
• Formatting permanently deletes all data in the memory card. Be sure to transfer
important pictures to a computer before formatting.
• If the error message “Card is not formatted. Format card?” is displayed when you
insert a memory card into this camera, the memory card must be formatted. If
the memory card contains images you wish to keep, select No and save those
images on your computer before formatting the memory card. To format the
card, select Yes and press the k button.
• Do not perform the following during formatting, while data is being written to
or deleted from the memory card, or during data transfer to a computer.
Failure to observe this precaution could result in loss of data or damage to the
memory card:
- Open the battery-chamber/memory card slot cover to remove the battery or
memory card.
- Turn off the camera
- Disconnect the AC adapter
Caring for the Camera
Cleaning
Avoid touching glass parts with your fingers. Remove dust or lint with a blower
(typically a small device with a rubber bulb attached to one end that is
pumped to produce a stream of air out the other end). To remove fingerprints,
oily substances, or other stains that cannot be removed with a blower, carefully
Lens/
wipe the lens with a dry soft cloth or eyewear cleaning cloth, using a spiral
viewfinder
motion that starts at the center of the lens and working toward the edges. Do
not wipe the lens forcibly or with a hard material. Failure to observe this
precaution could result in damage or trouble. If this fails, clean the lens using a
cloth lightly dampened with commercial lens cleaner.
Monitor
Remove dust or lint with a blower. To remove fingerprints, oily substances or
other stains, carefully wipe the monitor with a dry soft cloth or eyewear
cleaning cloth. Do not wipe the monitor forcibly or with a hard material. Failure
to observe this precaution could result in damage or trouble.
Body
Use a blower to remove dust, dirt, or sand, then wipe gently with a soft, dry
cloth. After using the camera at the beach or other sandy or dusty
environment, wipe off any sand, dust, or salt with a dry cloth lightly dampened
with fresh water and dry thoroughly. Note that foreign matter inside the
camera could cause damage not covered by the warranty.
Technical Notes and Index
Do not use volatile organic solvents such as alcohol or thinner, chemical
detergents, anticorrosive agents, or anti-fogging agents.
Storage
Remove the battery if the camera will not be used for an extended period. Do not
store the camera with naphtha or camphor moth balls, or in any of the following
locations:
• Next to equipment that produces strong electromagnetic fields, such as
televisions or radios
• Exposed to temperatures below –10°C (14°F) or above 50°C (122°F)
• Places that are poorly ventilated or subject to humidity of over 60%
To prevent mold or mildew, take the camera out of storage at least once a month.
Turn the camera on and release the shutter a few times before putting the camera
away again.
Be sure to read and follow the warnings given in “The Battery” (F3) of “Caring for
the Products” to store the battery.
F6
Troubleshooting
If the camera fails to function as expected, check the list of common problems
below before consulting your retailer or Nikon-authorized service representative.
Refer to the page numbers in the right-most column for more information.
• See “Error Messages” (E107) for more information.
Power, Display, Settings Issues
Problem
A
Cause/Solution
• Battery is exhausted.
• If no operations are performed for a while, camera has
turned off automatically by auto off to save power.
• Inside of the camera has become hot. Leave the camera
off until the inside of the camera has cooled.
• At low temperatures, the camera and the battery may not
function normally.
24
25
25
24
25
Monitor is blank.
• Camera is off.
• Battery is exhausted.
• Standby mode for saving power: Press the power switch,
shutter-release button or the c button, or rotate the
mode dial.
• Monitor is turned off. Press the x button to turn it on.
• Camera and computer are connected via USB cable.
• Camera and TV are connected via A/V cable or HDMI
cable.
• Interval timer shooting in progress.
16
Monitor is hard to
see.
• Ambient lighting too bright: Use viewfinder or move to
darker location.
• Adjust monitor brightness.
• Monitor is dirty. Clean monitor.
• Use monitor brightness boost.
The viewfinder is
hard to read.
Adjust diopter adjustment control.
16
Date and time of
recording are not
correct.
• If the camera clock has not been set (“Date not set”
26, 104
indicator blinks during shooting), recording date and
time is recorded as “01/01/11 00:00.” Set the correct date
and time using Time zone and date in the setup menu.
• The camera clock is not as accurate as a normal clock,
104
such as watches. Check camera clock regularly against
more accurate timepieces and reset as required.
No information
displayed in
monitor.
Shooting information and photo information may be
hidden. Press the x button until shooting information or
photo information is displayed.
Camera turns off
without warning.
–
F3
15
91
91
Technical Notes and Index
54
16, 104
F6
16
15
F7
Troubleshooting
Problem
Print date not
available.
A
Cause/Solution
Time zone and date has not been set.
• A shooting mode that does not support print date is
Date not
selected.
appearing on
pictures even
• Another function that is set now is restricting the print
when Print date is
date.
enabled.
• The date cannot be imprinted onto a movie.
26, 104
104
80
–
Camera settings
reset.
Clock battery is exhausted; all settings were restored to their
27
default values.
Reset file
numbering
cannot be done.
• Reset file numbering cannot be applied when the
folder number reaches 999 and there are images in the
folder. Change the memory card, or format the internal
memory/memory card.
• Reset file numbering cannot be set when the scene
mode is set to Panorama assist, or when the shooting
mode is A, B, C, D, E, F or N and Intvl timer
shooting is chosen for Continuous in the shooting
menu.
104,
E83
45
Battery temperature is high. Turn off camera, and allow
Monitor is turned battery to cool down before resuming use. After the lamp
off, and the power- blinks for three minutes, the camera turns off automatically, 25
on lamp flickers.
but you can also press the power switch to turn it off
manually.
Technical Notes and Index
Camera
temperature rises.
When functions such as movie recording or sending images
using an Eye-Fi card are used for a long time, or when the
99
camera is used in a location with a high ambient
temperature, the camera temperature may rise. This is not a
malfunction.
b Electronically Controlled Cameras
In extremely rare instances, unusual characters may appear on the monitor and the
camera may stop functioning. In most cases, this phenomenon is caused by a
strong external static charge. Turn the camera off, remove and replace the battery,
then turn the camera on again. Note that disconnecting the power source as
described above may result in the loss of any data not recorded on the internal
memory or memory card at the time the problem occurred. Data already recorded
is not affected. In the event of continued malfunction, contact your retailer or
Nikon-authorized service representative.
F8
Troubleshooting
Shooting Issues
Problem
Cause/Solution
A
Cannot set to
shooting mode.
Disconnect the HDMI cable or USB cable.
91
34
No picture taken
when shutterrelease button is
pressed.
• When camera is in playback mode, press the c or
shutter-release button.
• When menus are displayed, press the d button.
• Battery is exhausted.
• When the scene mode is Night portrait or
Backlighting with HDR set to Off or Continuous in the
shooting menu is set to Continuous flash, raise the
flash.
• When flash lamp blinks, flash is charging.
• Group A has not been selected for group setting when
shooting using wireless multiple flash-unit photography.
Set the group setting of the master commander and
remote flash unit to Group A.
40, 42,
67
Camera cannot
focus.
• Subject is too close to the camera. Try shooting with D
(macro close-up) in the focus mode, or Scene auto
selector or Close-up scene mode.
• The intended subject is one with which autofocus does
not perform well.
• Set AF assist in the setup menu to Auto.
• Subject not in focus area when shutter-release button
pressed halfway.
• The focus mode is set to E (manual focus).
• Turn camera off and then on again.
•
•
•
•
61
54
54
64
Use flash.
Use vibration reduction and motion detection.
Use D (Best Shot Selector).
Use a tripod to stabilize the camera (use with the selftimer for better results).
61
E102
33
104
32, 54
Technical Notes and Index
Pictures are
blurred.
13
24
41, 44,
54, 61
67
25
Streaks of light or
partial
discoloration are
visible on the
monitor.
Smear occurs when extremely bright light strikes the image
sensor. When shooting with Continuous set to Multi-shot 16
and when recording movies, avoiding bright objects, such F2
as the sun, reflections of the sun, and electric lights is
recommended.
Bright specks
appear in pictures
shot using flash.
Flash is reflecting off particles in air. Set the flash to W (off ). 62
F9
Troubleshooting
Problem
Cause/Solution
•
•
•
Flash does not fire.
•
•
Zoom does not
operate.
The digital zoom is
not available.
Image size not
available.
Flash is set to W (off ).
A scene mode that cannot turn on flash is selected.
The movie mode is selected.
Another function that is set now is restricting the flash.
Built-in flash does not fire when a Speedlight (external
flash unit) (available separately) is used.
A
62
61
98
80
E101
• On is selected for Wide-angle converter in the
shooting menu.
• When the lens ring is removed while the camera is on,
the zoom is fixed in a wide-angle end. Turn the camera
off, attach the lens ring, and then turn the camera on
again.
• Remove the wide-angle converter, and attach the lens
ring.
54,
E54
E54
• Off is selected for Digital zoom in the setup menu.
• When Scene auto selector, Portrait, Night portrait,
Backlighting with HDR set to On or Pet portrait is
selected in scene mode, the digital zoom cannot be used.
• Other functions that restrict the use of digital zoom is set.
104
40, 41,
44, 45
Another function that is set now is restricting Image size.
80
Technical Notes and Index
• Off is selected for Shutter sound under Sound
settings in the setup menu.
• Sports, Museum, Backlighting with HDR set to On or
No sound when
Pet portrait is selected in scene mode.
shutter is released. • The movie mode is selected.
• Other functions that restrict the use of the shutter sound
are set.
• Do not block the speaker.
E54
80
104
41, 43,
44, 45
98
80
3
AF-assist
illuminator does
not light.
Off is selected for AF assist in the setup menu. Even when
Auto is set, AF-assist illuminator may not light depending 104
on the focus area position or scene mode.
Pictures appear
smeared.
Lens is dirty. Clean lens.
F6
Colors are
unnatural.
White balance does not match light source.
72
When the subject is backlit or when shooting with an
Ring-shaped or
extremely bright light source in the display, such as in
rainbow-colored
sunlight, ring-shaped or rainbow-colored bands may
bands are seen on
appear on the image.
the screen or the
Change the position of the light source or remove it from
shot image.
the display, and try shooting again.
F10
–
Troubleshooting
Problem
Cause/Solution
Randomly spaced
bright pixels
(“noise”) appear in
image.
As the subject is dark, shutter speed is too slow or ISO
sensitivity is too high.
• Use flash.
• Specify a lower ISO sensitivity setting.
• Apply Long exposure NR in the shooting menu to suit
situations.
Pictures are too
dark
(underexposed).
Flash is set to W (off ).
Flash window is blocked.
Subject is beyond flash range.
Adjust exposure compensation.
Raise the ISO sensitivity.
Subject is backlit. Raise the flash, and set the scene mode
to Backlighting with HDR set to Off or set the flash
mode to X (fill flash).
• On is selected for Built-in ND filter in the setup menu.
62
30
61
71
72
44, 61
• Adjust exposure compensation.
• Use Built-in ND filter setting in the setup menu.
71
104
Pictures are too
bright
(overexposed).
•
•
•
•
•
•
A
61
72
54
E85
Skin softening
results are not as
expected.
• Skin softening may not produce the desired results
depending on shooting conditions.
• For pictures with four or more faces, try using Skin
softening in the playback menu.
Saving images
takes time.
It may take more time to save images in the following
situations.
• When the noise reduction function is in operation
• When flash is set to V (auto with red-eye reduction)
• When using Portrait or Night portrait scene mode
while shooting
• When using smile timer while shooting
• When using Active D-Lighting while shooting
• When Image quality is set to NRW (RAW), NRW (RAW)
+ Fine, NRW (RAW) + Normal or NRW (RAW) + Basic
86
89
54
62
40, 41
65
54
75
Cannot set or use
Another function that is set now is restricting the
Continuous or
Continuous setting or Auto bracketing.
Auto bracketing.
80
Cannot set
COOLPIX Picture
Control.
80
Another function that is set now is restricting COOLPIX
Picture Control.
Technical Notes and Index
When V (auto with red-eye reduction) or “fill flash with
red-eye reduction” of the Night portrait scene mode is
Areas not affected applied during shooting, In-Camera Red-Eye Fix may, in very
by red-eye are also rare cases, be applied to areas not affected by red-eye. Set a 41, 61
flash mode other than V (auto with red-eye reduction),
corrected.
select a scene mode other than Night portrait, and
resume shooting.
F11
Troubleshooting
Playback Issues
Problem
File cannot be
played back.
A
Cause/Solution
• File was overwritten or renamed by computer or another –
make or model of camera.
• File cannot be played back during interval timer shooting. 54
• NRW (RAW) images or movies recorded with cameras
75, 98
other than COOLPIX P7100 cannot be played back.
• Playback zoom cannot be used with movies, small pictures, –
or cropped copies of size 320 × 240 pixels or smaller.
Cannot zoom in on
• Playback zoom may not be available for pictures taken
–
picture.
with cameras other than COOLPIX P7100.
Technical Notes and Index
Cannot record or
play back voice
memo.
• Voice memos cannot be attached to movies.
• Voice memos cannot be attached to pictures taken with
cameras other than COOLPIX P7100, and voice memos
recorded by other cameras cannot be played back.
102
89
Pictures and
movies cannot be
edited.
• Confirm the conditions that are required for editing
pictures or movies.
• Pictures and movies taken with cameras other than
COOLPIX P7100 cannot be edited.
70, E10
Pictures not
displayed on
television.
• Video mode or HDMI is not correctly set in the TV
104
settings setup menu.
• Cables are connected to both the HDMI mini connector 91
and USB/audio video connector.
• Memory card contains no pictures. Replace memory card. 22
Remove memory card to play back pictures from internal
memory.
Nikon Transfer 2
does not start
when camera is
connected to a
computer.
•
•
•
•
•
Camera is off.
Battery is exhausted.
USB cable is not correctly connected.
Camera is not recognized by the computer.
Confirm that the operating system used is compatible
with the camera.
• Computer is not set to launch Nikon Transfer 2 automatically.
For more information on Nikon Transfer 2, refer to help
information contained in ViewNX 2.
–
25
24
91
–
92
95
Pictures to be
printed are not
displayed.
• Memory card contains no pictures. Replace memory card. 22
• Remove memory card to print pictures from internal
23
memory.
Cannot select
paper size with
camera.
Paper size cannot be selected from the camera in the
following situations, even for PictBridge compatible printers.
Use the printer to select paper size.
• The paper size selected using the camera is not
E24, E25
compatible with the printer.
• A printer that automatically sets the paper size is being
–
used.
F12
Specifications
Nikon COOLPIX P7100 Digital Camera
Type
Effective pixels
Image sensor
Lens
Focal length
f/-number
Construction
Digital zoom
Vibration reduction
Autofocus (AF)
Focus range
(from lens)
Focus-area selection
Viewfinder
Monitor
Frame coverage
(shooting mode)
Frame coverage
(playback mode)
Storage
Media
File system
File formats
Internal memory (approx. 94 MB)
SD/SDHC/SDXC memory card
DCF, Exif 2.3, and DPOF compliant
Still pictures: JPEG, NRW (RAW)
• RAW and JPEG can be recorded simultaneously
Sound files (voice memo): WAV
Movies: MOV (Video: H.264/MPEG-4 AVC, Audio: AAC stereo)
F13
Technical Notes and Index
Frame coverage
Compact digital camera
10.1 million
1/1.7-in. type CCD; approx. 10.39 million total pixels
7.1× optical zoom, NIKKOR lens
6.0-42.6mm (angle of view equivalent to that of 28-200 mm
lens in 35mm [135] format)
f/2.8-5.6
11 elements in 9 groups (including 2 ED lens elements)
Up to 4× (angle of view equivalent to that of approx. 800 mm lens
in 35mm [135] format)
Lens shift
Contrast-detect AF
• Approx. 50 cm (1 ft 8 in.) to ∞ (f), approx. 80 cm (2 ft 8 in.) to
∞ (g)
• Macro close-up mode: Approx. 2 cm (0.8 in.) (at a wide-angle
position) to ∞
Face priority, auto (9-area automatic selection), center (wide,
normal, spot), manual with 99 focus areas, subject tracking
Real-image optical viewfinder, with diopter adjustment
function (–3 to +1 m-1)
Approx. 80% horizontal and 80% vertical (compared to actual
picture)
7.5 cm (3-in.), approx. 921k-dot, wide viewing angle TFT LCD
monitor with anti-reflection coating and 5-level brightness
adjustment, tiltable approx. 81° downward, approx. 105°
upward
Approx. 96% horizontal and 96% vertical (compared to actual
picture)
Approx. 100% horizontal and 100% vertical (compared to
actual picture)
Specifications
Image size
(pixels)
ISO sensitivity
(Standard output
sensitivity)
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
10 M
3648×2736
• 8M
3264×2448
5M
2592×1944
• 3M
2048×1536
2M
1600×1200
• 1M
1280×960
PC
1024×768
• VGA
640×480
3:2
3648×2432
• 16:9
3584×2016
1:1
2736×2736
ISO 100, 200, 400, 800, 1600, 3200, Hi 1 (equivalent to 6400)
Auto (auto gain from ISO 100 to 800)
High ISO sensitivity auto (ISO 100 to 1600)
Fixed range auto (ISO 100 to 200, 100 to 400)
Low noise night mode (ISO 400 to 12800)
Exposure
Metering
Exposure control
Shutter
Speed
Technical Notes and Index
Aperture
Range
Self-timer
Built-in flash
Range (approx.)
(ISO sensitivity: Auto)
Flash control
Accessory shoe
Interface
Data transfer protocol
Video output
HDMI output
F14
256-segment matrix, center-weighted, spot, spot AF area (with
support for 99 focus areas)
Programmed auto exposure with flexible program, shutter
priority auto, aperture-priority auto, manual, exposure
bracketing (Tv), exposure bracketing (Sv), motion detection,
exposure compensation (–3.0 to +3.0 EV in steps of 1/3 EV)
Mechanical and charge-coupled electronic shutter
• 1/2000 - 8 s (A, B mode)
• 1/4000 - 8 s (C mode)
• 1/4000 - 60 s (D mode)
• 4 s (Fireworks show scene mode)
• 1/2000 - 2 s (in shooting modes other than the above)
Electronically-controlled 6-blade iris diaphragm
10 steps of 1/3 EV (f) (C, D mode)
Durations of 2 or 10 seconds can be selected
[W]: 0.3 to 9.0 m (1 ft to 29 ft)
[T]: 0.3 to 4.5 m (1 ft to 14 ft)
TTL auto flash with monitor preflashes
ISO 518 hot-shoe contact with sync and data contacts and
safety lock
Hi-Speed USB
MTP, PTP
Can be selected from NTSC and PAL
Can be selected from Auto, 480p, 720p, and 1080i
Specifications
I/O terminal
Supported languages
Power sources
Battery life
(EN-EL14)
Tripod socket
Dimensions
(W × H × D)
Weight
Operating environment
Temperature
Humidity
Audio/video output; digital I/O (USB);
HDMI Mini Connector (Type C) (HDMI output),
external microphone connector (stereo mini-pin jack (3.5 mm
diameter), plug-in power type)
Arabic, Brazilian Portuguese, Chinese (Simplified and
Traditional), Czech, Danish, Dutch, English, Finnish, French,
German, Greek, Hindi, Hungarian, Indonesian, Italian, Japanese,
Korean, Norwegian, Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian,
Spanish, Swedish, Thai, Turkish, Ukrainian, Vietnamese
• One Rechargeable Li-ion Battery EN-EL14 (included)
• AC Adapter EH-5b (used in combination with the Power
Connector EP-5A) (available separately)
Still pictures1: Approx. 350 shots
Movies2: Approx. 2 h 55 min (HD 720p (1280×720))
1/4 (ISO 1222)
Approx. 116.3 × 76.9 × 48.0 mm (4.6 × 3.1 × 1.9 in.) (excluding
projections)
Approx. 395 g (14 oz) (including battery and SD memory card)
0°C to 40°C (32°F to 104°F)
85% and below (no condensation)
1
2
Based on Camera and Imaging Products Association (CIPA) standards for measuring the life
of camera batteries. Measured at 23 (±2)°C (73 (±4)°F); zoom adjusted with each shot, flash
fired with every other shot, image quality set to Normal, image size set to M 3648×2736.
Battery life may vary depending on shooting interval and length of time menus and images
are displayed.
When recording a single movie, the maximum recording time is 29 minutes even when
there is enough free space on the memory card.
F15
Technical Notes and Index
• Unless otherwise stated, all figures are for a camera with a fully-charged
Rechargeable Li-ion Battery EN-EL14 operated at an ambient temperature of
25°C (77°F).
Specifications
Rechargeable Li-ion Battery EN-EL14
Type
Rechargeable lithium-ion battery
Rated capacity
DC 7.4 V, 1030 mAh
Operating temperature
0°C to 40°C (32°F to 104°F)
Dimensions
(W × H × D)
Approx. 38 × 53 × 14 mm (1.5 × 2.1 × 0.6 in.) (excluding
projections)
Weight
Approx. 48 g (1.7 oz) (excluding terminal cover)
Battery Charger MH-24
Rated input
AC 100 to 240 V, 50/60 Hz, 0.2 A max.
Rated output
DC 8.4 V, 0.9 A
Supported rechargeable
battery
Rechargeable Li-ion Battery EN-EL14
Charging time
Approx. 1 hour and 30 minutes when no charge remains
Operating temperature
0°C to 40°C (32°F to 104°F)
Dimensions
(W × H × D)
Approx. 70 × 26 × 97 mm (2.8 × 1.0 × 3.8 in.)
For Argentina: Approx. 70 × 68 × 104 mm (2.8 × 2.7 × 4.1 in.)
Weight
Approx. 89 g (3.1 oz), excluding plug adapter
For Argentina: Approx. 125 g (4.5 oz)
Technical Notes and Index
B
Specifications
• Nikon will not be held liable for any errors this manual may contain.
• The appearance of this product and its specifications are subject to change without notice.
Supported Standards
• DCF: Design Rule for Camera File System is a standard widely used in the digital
camera industry to ensure compatibility among different makes of camera.
• DPOF: Digital Print Order Format is an industry-wide standard that allows
pictures to be printed at a digital photo lab or with a household printer from
print orders stored on the memory card.
• Exif version 2.3: This camera supports Exif (Exchangeable Image File Format
for Digital Still Cameras) version 2.3, a standard that allows information stored
with photographs to be used for optimal color reproduction when images are
output from Exif-compliant printers.
See the instruction manual of the printer for further details.
• PictBridge: A standard developed cooperatively by the digital camera and
printer industries, allowing photographs to be output directly to a printer
without connecting the camera to a computer.
F16
Index
Symbols
.MOV E99
.NRW E99
.WAV E99
A
AC adapter 19, E103
Accessory shoe E101
Accessory Shoe Cover E101
Active D-Lighting 55, E56
Adapter Ring E103
AE/AF lock button 107, E87
AF area mode 48, 50, 55, E48
AF assist 105, E78
AF mode 55, 101, E52, E69
AF/access lamp 32
Aperture value 51
Aperture-priority auto mode 51, E5
Audio/video cable 91, E20
Audio/video-in jack E20
Auto 62
Auto bracketing 73, E36
Auto off 106, E82
Auto with red-eye reduction 62
Autofocus mode 55, 68, 101, E52,
E69
AV cable 91, E20, E103
B
Backlighting o 44
Battery 18, 20, E103
Battery charger 18, E103
Battery level indicator 24
Battery-chamber/memory card slot cover
20, 22
Beach Z 41
Best shot selector 54, E45
Black border 90, E15
Blink warning 108, E92
BSS 54, E45
Built-in ND filter 107, E85
Button sound 106, E81
F17
Technical Notes and Index
R E4
gAE-L/AF-L button 5
G AF area mode 12, 48, 50, 55, E48
C Aperture-priority auto mode 51, E5
k Apply selection button 6, 12
d Auto bracketing 72, 73, E36
A Auto mode 28
l Delete button 5, 6, 36, 102, E67
m Flash mode 61
K Flash pop-up button 61
p Focus mode 67
w1 FUNC1 button 5, E57, E88,
E89
w2 FUNC2 button 5, E90
a Image quality/Image size/Movie
options 72, 73, 74, E42
h Image thumbnail display 35
b ISO sensitivity 72, 73, E30
C List by date button 6, 88
O Low noise night mode 49
D Manual mode 51, E7
d Menu button 4, 6, 13
x Monitor button 15
D Movie mode 98
I My Menu 72, 73, E90
a Picture Control 73, E38
c Playback button 5, 6, 34
i Playback zoom 35
A Programmed auto mode 51, E5
y Scene mode 39
n Self-timer/Remote control/Smile timer
64, 65, E105
B Shutter-priority auto mode 51, E5
u Special effects mode 46
g Tele 31
E, F or N User settings mode 57
c White balance 72, 73, E32
f Wide 31
.JPG E99
Index
C
F
Calendar display 35
Charger 18, E103
Close-up k 42
Color temperature E34
Computer 91
Continuous 50, 54, E45
Continuous flash 54, E45
Contrast E40
Converter lens E103
COOLPIX Custom Picture Control 54,
E43
COOLPIX Picture Control 54, E38
Copy n 43
Crop E19, E28
Custom Picture Control 54, E43
Customize command dials 107, E86
Customize My Menu 108, E90
Date and time 26, E71
Daylight saving time 27
Delete 36, 89, 102, E64, E67
Delete button options 107, E86
Digital zoom 31, 105, E79
Diopter adjustment control 16
Direct Print E22
Distortion control 55, E54
D-Lighting 89, E11
DPOF printing E27
DSCN E99
Dusk/dawn i 42
Face detection 85
Face priority 55, E48
Features that cannot be used
simultaneously 80
File name E99
Fill flash 62
Filter effects 89, E13, E40
Fireworks show m 43
Firmware version 108, E98
Fixed aperture 106, E80
Flash 61
Flash control 55, E55
Flash exp. comp. 50, 55, E52
Flash mode 61
Fn1 + command dial 108, E89
Fn1 + shutter button 107, E88
Fn1 guide display 108, E89
Fn2 button 108, E90
Focal length E57, F13
Focus 32, E48, E52
Focus area 32, E48
Focus lock 33
Focus mode 67
Folder name E99
Food u 43
Format 22, 106, E83
Format the internal memory 106, E83
Format the memory card 22, E83
FSCN E99
Full-frame playback 34
E
H
D
Technical Notes and Index
Editing movies E28
Editing Pictures E9
Exposure compensation 71
Exposure compensation dial 71
Exposure mode 51
Extension E99
External mic sensitivity 107, E84
Extracting still pictures 102
Eye-Fi upload 108, E93
Eyelet for camera strap 7
F18
HDMI 107, E20, E84
HDMI device control 107, E84
HDMI mini connector 91, E20
HDR 44
Hide image 89, E66
Histogram 15, 104, E74
Index
I
Identifier E99
Image copy 90, E68
Image quality 74, 75
Image sharpening E40
Image size 74, 77
Infinity 68
Internal memory indicator 24
Interval Timer Shooting 54, E45, E46
ISO sensitivity 73, E30
L
Landscape c 40
Language 106, E83
Lens F6, F13
Lens ring 2, E54
Lens ring release button 2, E54
Li-ion rechargeable battery 18, E103
List by date mode 88
Lithium-ion type battery 18, E103
Long exposure NR 55, E53
Low noise night mode 49
Low noise night mode menu 50
M
N
Night landscape j 42
Night portrait e 41
Noise reduction filter 55, E53
NRW (RAW) Images 76, E17
NRW (RAW) processing 90, E17
Number of exposures remaining 24, 78
O
Off 62
Optical zoom 31
Optional accessories E103
P
Panorama assist p 45, E3
Paper size E24, E25
Party/indoor f 41
Pet portrait O 45
Photo info 104, E74
PictBridge E22, F16
Picture Control 72, 73, E38
Playback 34, 102, E67
Playback menu 89
Playback mode 34
Playback zoom 35
Portrait b 40
Power 24, 25, 26
Power connector 19, E103
Power switch/power-on lamp 25
Preset manual E35
Pressing halfway 4, 32
Print E22, E24, E25
Print date 104, E75
Print order 89, E60
Print order date option E61
Printer 91, E22
Technical Notes and Index
Macro close-up 68
Main command dial 4, 6
Manual 62
Manual focus 68, E2
Manual mode 51, E7
Memory capacity 24
Memory card 22, 23
Memory card slot 22
Metering 50, 54, E44
MF distance indicator units 108, E94
Microphone 98, E67
Minimum shutter speed 73, E31
Monitor 7, 8, 10, F6
Monitor brightness 104, E74
Monitor brightness boost indicator 16
Monitor settings 104, E74
Motion detection 105, E77
Movie length 100
Movie menu 101
Movie mode 98
Movie options 73, E42
Movie playback 102
Movie recording 98
Multi selector 4, 6, 12, 60
Multi selector right press 107, E86
Multi-shot 16 54, E45
Museum l 43
F19
Index
Programmed auto mode 51, E5
Protect 89, E66
Q
Quick adjust E40
Quick menu 72
Quick menu dial 72
Quick retouch 89, E11
R
Rear-curtain sync 62
Rechargeable battery 18, E103
Record orientation 106, E81
Red-eye reduction 105, E78
Remote control 12, E105
Reset all 108, E94
Reset file numbering 108, E91
Reverse indicators 108, E94
Rotary multi selector 4, 6, 12, 60
Rotate image 89, E66
Rotate tall 106, E82
RSCN E99
S
Technical Notes and Index
Saturation E40
Save user setting E58
Scene auto selector x 40
Scene mode 39, 40
Selecting pictures E65
Self-timer 64
Self-timer lamp 64
Self-timer: after release 104, E76
Setup menu 104
Shooting 28
Shooting date information 15
Shooting menu 54
Shutter sound 106, E81
Shutter speed 51
Shutter-priority auto mode 51, E5
Shutter-release button 4, 6, 32
Single 54, E45
Skin softening 65, 86, 89, E12
Slide show 89, E63
F20
Slow sync 62
Small picture 89, E14
Smile timer 65
Snow z 42
Sound settings 106, E81
Special effects menu 48
Special effects mode 46
Speedlight 84, E101, E103
Sports d 41
SSCN E99
Straighten 90, E16
Sub-command dial 4, 6
Subject tracking 55, E49, E50
Sunset h 42
T
Tele 31
Thumbnail playback 35
Time difference E73
Time zone 26, E73
Time zone and date 26, 104, E71
Toning E41
TV settings 107, E84
U
USB cable 91, E23, E103
USB/audio/video output connector 91,
E20, E23
User setting modes 57
V
Vibration reduction 105, E76
Video mode 107, E84
View grid E39
View/hide framing grid 104, E74
View/hide histograms 104, E74
Viewfinder 16, F6
ViewNX 2 92
Virtual horizon 104, E74
Virtual horizon display 104, E74
Voice memo 90, E67
Volume 102
Index
W
Welcome screen 104, E70
White balance 73, E32
Wide 31
Wide-angle converter 55, E54, E103
Wind noise reduction 101, E69
Z
Zoom 31
Zoom control 4, 6, 31
Zoom memory 56, E57
Zoom speed 106, E80
Technical Notes and Index
F21
No reproduction in any form of this manual, in whole or in part
(except for brief quotation in critical articles or reviews), may be
made without written authorization from NIKON CORPORATION.
FX1I02(11)
© 2011 Nikon Corporation
6MM09811-02
Download PDF

advertising